Ba93sugb PDF

EDB9300UE
00403496
Operating Instructions
Global Drive
9300 servo
These Operating Instructions are valid for the 93XX controllers of the versions:
33.932X-
ES 2x. 2x
(9321 - 9328)
33.9329-
ES 2x. 2x
(9329)
33.933X-
ES 2x. 2x
(9330 - 9332)
33.932X-
ES 2x. 2x
(9321 - 9329)
33.933X-
ES 2x. 2x
(9330 - 9332)
33.932X-
CS 2x. 2x -V003
Cold Plate (9321 - 9328)
33.932X-
CS 2x. 2x -V003
Cold Plate (9321 - 9328)
Controller type
Design:
E = Enclosure IP20
IB = Module
Hardware version and index
Software version and index
Variant
Explanation
Corresponds to the German edition of 22/06/1998

Edition of:
25/09/1998
Screen plate mains connection
L1 L2 L3
Mains connection
and DC connection
+UG -UG
PE
RDY IMP Imax Mmax Fail
Detachable operating module

alternatively
Field buses
Interbus-S
X1
1250 rpm
MCTRL - N - ACT
GND LO HI
X3
ST1
A4 A3 A2 A1
System bus (CAN)
59 ST2
X5
39 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 28
X4
63 7 4 3
62 7
X6
2 1
Control terminals
Resolver input
X7
X8
Encoder input
1
Digital frequency input
X9
Screen connection
Digital frequency output
X10
PE
Screen plate control connections

PTC connection
T1 T2
U V W
Motor connection
Screen plate motor cables
K35.0002
Contents
Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.1
How to use these Operating Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.1
Terminology used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
What is new? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-1
1.2
1.3
Scope of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.1
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.2
2.3
Layout of the safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.2
3.3
General data/Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
Types 9321 to 9325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
Types 9321 to 9324 with 200% overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Types 9326 to 9332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
Fuses and cable cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5
Mains filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3.4
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
9300BA0998
Contents
ii
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2
Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets . . . . . . .
4.1.3
Assembly with thermally separated power stage (punching)
4.1.4
Assembly of variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-5
4.2
Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Protection of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3
Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4
Mains types/Mains conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5
Interactions with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6
Specification of the cables used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7
Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.1
Mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.2
Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.3
Connection of a brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.4
DC bus connection of several drives . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8
Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8.1
Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8.2
Assignment of the control terminals . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8.3
Connecting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.9
Motor temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.9.1
User-specific characteristic for a PTC thermistor
4.2.10
Feedback systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4-8
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-17
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-21
4-27
4-29
4-29
4.3
Installation of a CE-typical drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Initial switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1
Switch-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5.2
Input of the motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
5.3
Controller enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
5.4
Input of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
5.5
Quick stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
5.6
Change of the internal control structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9
5.7
Changing of the terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.1
Freely assignable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2
Freely assignable digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3
Freely assignable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4
Freely assignable monitor outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
5-10
5-12
5-13
5-13
During operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
Status indications of the operating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.2
Information on operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Switching on the motor side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Controller protection by current derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
6-2
9300BA0998
Contents
Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.1
Ways of parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1
Structure of the parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
List of the selection menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-2
7-3
7.2
Parameterization using the operating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.1
The operating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Change parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3
Save parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4
Load parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5
Parameter set transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6
Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7-7
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-14
7-16
7.3
Display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-16
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.1
Predefined configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1
Working with predefined configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1
Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1
Signal types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.2
Elements of a function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.3
Connect function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.4
Entries into the processing table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-11
8-14
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.1
Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.2
Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.3
Fault display via digital output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-18
8-18
8-20
8-22
Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9.1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9.2
9.3
Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2.1
Structure of the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2
Working with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
9.4
Rest of fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
9300BA0998
iii
Contents
11 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
11-1
11.1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11.2
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1
Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2
Torque control with speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.3
Digital frequency - master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.4
Digital frequency bus - slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.5
Digital frequency cascade - slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
11-2
11-5
11-7
11-10
11-12
11.3
Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-15
11.4
11.5
Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-60
11-65
11-66
9300BA0998
Preface and general information
1.1
How to use these Operating Instructions ...

- The present Operating Instructions will assist you in connecting and
commissioning the 93XX servo inverter. They contain safety information
which must be observed.
- All persons working on and with the controller must have the Operating
Instructions available and must observe the information and notes relevant
for their work.
- The Operating Instructions must always be in a complete and perfectly
readable state.
1.1.1
Terminology used
Term
93XX
Controller
Drive system
1.1.2
What is new?
Material no.
403496
1.2
In the following text used for

Any type of servo inverter (types 9321 ... 9332)
93XX servo inverter
Drive systems with 93XX servo inverters and other Lenze drive components
Edition
Important
25/09/1998 supersedes
395638
Contents
- Chapter 1 - 4 revised
- Acceleration drive mode
- Oscilloscope function
Scope of supply
Scope of supply
- 1 servo inverter type 93XX
- 1 book of operating instructions
- 1 accessory kit (bits and pieces for
mechanical and electrical installation)
Important
After reception of the delivery, check immediately whether the scope
of supply matches with the accompanying papers. Lenze does not
accept any liability for deficiencies claimed subsequently.
Claim
- visible transport damage immediately to the forwarder.
- visible deficiencies/incompleteness immediately to your Lenze
representative.
9300BA0998
1-1
1.3
Legal regulations
Identification
Nameplate
Lenze controllers are unambiguously
designated by the contents of the
nameplate.
Application
as directed
93XX servo inverter

- Operate the controller only under the conditions prescribed in these operating instructions.
- are components
- for open- and closed-loop control of variable speed drives with standard AC asynchronous motors or
asynchronous servo motors.
- for installation in a machine
- used for assembly together with other components to form a machine.
- are electric units for the installation into control cabinets or similar enclosed operating housing.
- comply with the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive.
- are not machines for the purpose of the Machinery Directive.
- are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial purposes.
Drive systems with 93XX servo inverters
- comply with the EMC Directive if they are installed according to the guidelines of CE-typical drive systems.
- can be used
- for operation at public and non-public mains
- for operation in industrial premises and residential areas.
- The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the EC directives.
Any other use shall be deemed as inappropriate!
- The information, data, and notes in these instructions met the state of the art at the time of printing. Claims on
modificationss referring to controllers which have already been supplied cannot be derived from the information,
illustrations, and descriptions.
- The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in these instructions are for guidance only and must be
adapted to your own specific application. Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the process and
circuit proposals.
- The specifications in these instructions describe the product features without guaranteeing them.
- Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference caused by:
- Disregarding the operating instructions
- unauthorized modifications to the controller
- operating errors
- improper working on and with the controller
- Warranty conditions: see Sales and Delivery Conditions of Lenze GmbH & Co KG.
- Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the deficiency or fault.
- The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
Material
recycle
dispose
Metal
Plastic
Assembled PCBs
-
Liability
Warranty
Waste
di
disposal
l
1-2
9300BA0998
CE-identification
Conforms to the EC Low Voltage
Directive
Manufacturer
Lenze GmbH & Co KG
Postfach 101352
D-31763 Hameln
Safety information
2
2.1
Safety information
General safety information
Safety and application notes for controllers
(according to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)
General The product-specific safety and application

notes in these Operating Instructions must also be
observed!
During operation, drive controllers may have, according to their
type of protection, live, bare, in some cases also movable or
rotating parts as well as hot surfaces.
Non-authorized removal of the required cover, inappropriate use,
incorrect installation or operation, creates the risk of severe injury
to persons or damage to material assets.
Further information can be obtained from the documentation.
All operations concerning transport, installation, and
commissioning as well as maintenance must be carried out by
qualified, skilled personnel (IEC 364 and CENELEC HD 384 or
DIN VDE 0100 and IEC report 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national
regulations for the prevention of accidents must be observed).
According to this basic safety information qualified skilled
personnel are persons who are familiar with the erection,
assembly, commissioning, and operation of the product and who
have the qualifications necessary for their occupation.
2. Application as directed
Drive controllers are components which are designed for
installation in electrical systems or machinery.
When installing in machines, commissioning of the drive
controllers (i.e. the starting of operation as directed) is prohibited
until it is proven that the machine corresponds to the regulations
of the EC Directive 89/392/EEC (Machinery Directive); EN 60204
must be observed.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of operation as directed) is only
allowed when there is compliance with the EMC Directive
(89/336/EEC).
The drive controllers meet the requirements of the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC. The standards of the EN 50178/ DIN VDE
0160, EN 60439-1/DIN VDE 0660 part 500 and EN60146/DIN
VDE 0558 are applicable to drive controllers.
The technical data and information on the connection conditions
must be obtained from the nameplate and the documentation and
must be observed in all cases.
3. Transport, storage
Notes on transport, storage and appropriate handling must be
observed.
Climatic conditions must be observed according to prEN 50178.
4. Erection
The devices must be erected and cooled according to the
regulations of the corresponding documentation.
The drive controllers must be protected from inappropriate loads.
Particularly during transport and handling, components must not
be bent and/or isolating distances must not be changed. Touching
of electronic components and contacts must be avoided.
Drive controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components
which can easily be damaged by inappropriate handling. Electrical
components must not be damaged or destroyed mechanically
(health risks are possible!).
5. Electrical connection
When working on live drive controllers, the valid national
regulations for the prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4) must be
observed.
The electrical installation must be carried out according to the
appropriate regulations (e.g. cable cross-sections, fuses, PE
connection). More detailed information is included in the
documentation.
Notes concerning the installation in compliance with EMC - such
as screening, grounding, arrangement of filters and laying of
cables - are included in the documentation of the drive
controllers. These notes must also be observed in all cases for
drive controllers with the CE mark. The compliance with the
required limit values demanded by the EMC legislation is the
responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine.
6. Operation
Systems where drive controllers are installed must be equipped,
if necessary, with additional monitoring and protective devices
according to the valid safety regulations, e.g. law on technical
tools, regulations for the prevention of accidents, etc.
Modifications of the drive controllers by the operating software
are allowed.
After disconnecting the drive controllers from the supply voltage,
live parts of the controller and power connections must not be
touched immediately, because of possibly charged capacitors. For
this, observe the corresponding labels on the drive controllers.
During operation, all covers and doors must be closed.
7. Maintenance and servicing
The manufacturers documentation must be observed.
This safety information must be kept!
The product-specific safety and application notes in these Operating Instructions must also be observed!
9300BA0998
2-1
Safety information
2.2
Layout of the safety information

- All safety information has a uniform layout:
- The icon characterizes the type of danger.
- The signal word characterizes the severity of danger.
- The note text describes the danger and gives information how to prevent
dangerous situations.
Signal word
Note
Icons used
Warning of
hazardous
electrical voltage
Warning of
damage to
persons
Warning of a
general danger
Signal words
Danger!
Warns of impeding dangeU .
Consequences if disregarded:
Death or severe injuries
Warning!
Caution!
Warning of
damage to
material
Stop!
Other notes
Tip!
2.3
2-2
Warns of potential, very hazardous situation.

Possible consequences if disregarded:
Death or severe injuries
Warns of a potential, hazardous situation.
Light or minor injuries.
Warns of a potential damage to material.
Damage of the controller/drive system or its environment .
This note designates general, useful notes.
If you observe it, handling of the controller/drive system is
made easier.
Residual hazards
Protection of persons
After mains voltage disconnection the power terminals U, V, W and + UG, -UG carry hazardous voltages at
least 3 minutes after mains disconnection.
- Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied to the power terminals.
Controller protection
Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply voltage at L1, L2, L3 or + UG, + UG may
overload the internal input current load:
- Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and reconnection.
Overspeeds
Drive systems can reach dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting high field frequencies for motors and
machines which are not suitable):
- The controllers do not offer any protection against these operating conditions. Use additional
components for this.
9300BA0998
Technical Data
3
3.1
Technical data
Features
- Single axis in narrow design
- thus space-saving installation
- Power range: 370 W to 75 kW
- uniform control module and thus uniform connection for the control cables
over the complete power range
- Heat sink can be separated
- the cooling can be achieved outside the control cabinet
(punching or Cold Plate)
- Power connections from the top (supply) or from the bottom (motor)
- simple connection for multi-axis applications
- Direct connection of resolver and encoder feedback
- simple connection via prefabricated cables (accessories)
- connecting cables can be plugged
- Integrated phase controller for driftfree standstill
- Field-oriented control for asynchronous and synchronous motors
- Vector modulation
- Digital synchronization system via digital frequency
- setpoint transmission without offset - und gain errors
- Synchronization in speed and rotor position
- Homing function
- Application configuration for control functions and input/output signals
- comprehensive function block library
- high flexibility in the adaptation of the internal control structure to the
application
- Integrated automation interface
- simple extensions of the controller functions
- System bus for the connection of servo inverters and for the extension of
input and output terminals
- Approval of standard devices UL 508, File No. 132659 (listed)
- Approval 9371 BB (BAE) UL 508, File No. 132659 (listed)
9300BA0998
3-1
Technical Data
3.2
General data/ Operating conditions
Field
Vibration resistance
Permissible humidity
Values
Germanischer Lloyd, general conditions (in preparation)
Humidity class F without condensation
(medium relative humidity 85 %)
Permissible temperature ranges
during transport of the controller:

during storage of the controller:
during operation of the controller:
Permissible installation height h

Degree of pollution
Noise emission
Noise immunity
Insulation strength
Packing
Type of protection
Approvals
3-2
9300BA0998
-25 C + 70 C
-25 C + 55 C
0 C + 40 C
+ 40 C + 55 C
without derating
with derating
without derating
with derating
h 1000 m a.m.s.l.
1000 m a.m.s.l.
h 4000 m a.m.s.l.
VDE 0110 part 2 pollution degree 2
Requirements acc. to EN 50081-2, EN 50082-1, IEC 22G-WG4 (Cv) 21
Limit value class A acc. to EN 55011 (inddustrial area) with mains filter A
Limit value class B acc. to EN 55022 (residential area) with mains filter B and installation to
control cabinet
Limit values maintained using mains filter.
Requirements acc. to EN 50082-2, IEC 22G-WG4 (Cv) 21 .
Requirements
Standard
Severities
ESD
EN61000-4-2 3, i.e. 8 kV for air discharge
and 6 kV for contact discharge
RF interference
(enclosure)
EN61000-4-3 3, i.e. 10 V/m; 27 to 1000 MHz
Burst
EN61000-4-4 3/4, i.e. 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge (on
mains cable)
IEC 1000-4-5 3, i.e. 1,2/50 s
1 kV phase-phase, 2 kV phase-PE
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
acc. to DIN 4180
- 9321 to 9333: Delivery packing
IP20
IP41 on the heat-sink side for thermal separation (punching)
NEMA 1:Protection against contact
CE:
Low Voltage Directive

EMC Directive in preparation
UL508: Industrial Control Equipment
UL508C:Power Conversion Equipment
Technical Data
3.3
Ratings
3.3.1
Types 9321 to 9325

Type
Order no.
EVS9321-ES
EVS9321-ES
EVS9322-ES
EVS9322-ES
EVS9323-ES
EVS9323-ES
EVS9324-ES
EVS9324-ES
EVS9325-ES
EVS9325-ES
Type
EVS9321-CSV
003
EVS9322-CSV
003
EVS9323-CSV
003
ESV9324-CSV
003
ESV9325-CSV
003
Order no. EVS9321-CSV0 EVS9322-CSV0 EVS9323-CSV0 EVS9324-CSV0 EVS9325-CSV0

03
03
03
03
03
Mains voltage
Alternative DC supply
Mains current with mains filter
Mains current without mains
filter
U r [V]
U G [V]
Ir [A]
320 V 0% $ Ur $ 528 V 0% ; 45 Hz 65 Hz 0%
460 V 0% $ UG $ 740 V 0%
1.5
2.5
3.9
7.0
12.0
2.1
3.5
5.5
16.8
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400V / 50Hz/ 60Hz

Motor power (4-pole
(
ASM))
Pr [kW]
0.37
Pr [hp]
0.5
Output power U, V, W (8kHz*)
S r8 [kVA]
1.0
Output power + UG, -UG 2)
PDC [kW]
2.0
Output current (8 kHz*)
Ir8 [A]
1.5
Ir16 [A]
1.1
max output current (8 kHz*)1)
Imax8 [A]
2.3
max output current (16 kHz*)1) Imax16 [A]
1.7
max. standstill current (8 kHz*)
I08 [A]
2.3
max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A]
1.7
0.75
1.0
1.7
0.75
2.5
1.8
3.8
2.7
3.8
2.7
1.5
2.0
2.7
2.2
3.9
2.9
5.9
4.4
5.9
4.4
3.0
4.0
4.8
0.75
7.0
5.2
10.5
7.8
10.5
7.8

Motor power (4-pole
(
ASM))
Pr [kW]
0.37
0.75
1.5
3.0
Pr [hp]
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
Output power U, V, W (8kHz*)
S r8 [kVA]
1.2
2.1
3.2
5.8
PDC [kW]
2.0
0.75
2.2
0.75
Ir8 [A]
1.5
2.5
3.9
7.0
Ir16 [A]
1.1
1.8
2.9
5.2
Imax8 [A]
2.3
3.8
5.9
10.5
1.7
2.7
4.4
7.8
I08 [A]
2.3
3.8
5.9
10.5
max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A]
1.7
2.7
4.4
7.8
Motor voltage
U M [V]
0-3
UMains
Power loss (operation with Irx)
Pv [W]
100
110
140
200
Power derating
[%/K]
40 C < Ta < 55 C: 2%/K (no UL approval)
[%/m]
1000 m a.m.s.l. h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5%/1000m
Weight
m [kg]
3.5
3.5
5.0
5.0
5.5
7.5
9.0
0
13.0
9.7
19.5
14.6
19.5
14.6
5.5
7.5
10.8
0
13.0
9.7
19.5
14.6
19.5
14.6
260
7.5
1)
The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and 2
minutes base load with 75% Irx
2) When operated under rated load the controller can supply this power in addition.
*
Chopping frequency of the inverter (C0018)
9300BA0998
3-3
Technical Data
3.3.2
Types 9321 to 9324 with 200% overcurrent

Type
9322
9323
9324

Motor power (4-pole
(
ASM))
Pr [kW]
0.37
Pr [hp]
0.5
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz)
S r8 [kVA]
1.0
2)
Output current (8 kHz)
Ir8 [A]
1.5
Output current (16 kHz) 2)
Ir16 [A]
1.1
max output current (8 kHz)1)
Imax8 [A]
3.0
Imax16 [A]
2.2
max. standstill current (8 kHz)
I08 [A]
3.0
I016 [A]
2.2
0.75
1.0
1.7
2.5
1.8
5.0
3.6
5.0
3.6
1.5
2.0
2.7
3.9
2.9
7.8
5.8
7.8
5.8
3.0
4.0
4.8
7.0
5.2
14.0
10.4
14.0
10.4

Motor power (4-pole
(
ASM))
Pr [kW]
0.37
Pr [hp]
0.5
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz)
S r8 [kVA]
1.2
Ir8 [A]
1.5
Ir16 [A]
1.1
1)
max output current (8 kHz)
Imax8 [A]
3.0
Imax16 [A]
2.2
I08 [A]
3.0
I016 [A]
2.2
0.75
1.0
2.1
2.5
1.8
5.0
3.6
5.0
3.6
1.5
2.0
3.2
3.9
2.9
7.8
5.8
7.8
5.8
3.0
4.0
5.8
7.0
5.2
14.0
10.4
14.0
10.4
1)
9321
The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 10 second overcurrent with the current mentioned here and 50
seconds base load mit 44 % Irx
Majority in
individ. cases
Setting in
code C0022
thermal
continuous
current
Maximum current
phase
Recovery phase
Continuous power
Imax %
150 % IrX
100 % IrX
150 % IrX for 60 s
75 % IrX for 120 s
Peak power
Imax >
150 % IrX
70 % IrX
200 % IrX for 10 s
44 % IrX for 50 s
2)
This output current INx applies for a maximum current to be set under C022 which has not exceeded 150% of
the rated controller current (nameplate)
If the maximum current is higher than this value, the continuous current reduces automatically to 70% of the
original value
For overcurrent diagram see chapter 8.5.2
For all other data see chapter 3.3.1
Tip!
You can change to Imax> 150 % IrX only when the controller is inhibited.
3-4
9300BA0998
Technical Data
3.3.3
Types 9326 to 9332

Type
EVS9326ES
Order no. EVS9326ES
EVS9327ES
EVS9327ES
Type
EVS9326- EVS9227- EVS9328CSV003

CSV003
CSV003
Order no. EVS9326CSV003

Mains voltage
Alternative DC supply
Mains current with mains filter
Mains current without mains
filter
U r [V]
U G [V]
Ir [A]
20.5
-
EVS9327CSV003
EVS9328ES
EVS9328ES
EVS9329ES
EVS9329ES
EVS9330ES
EVS9330ES
EVS9331ES
EVS9331ES
EVS9328CSV003
320 V 0% $ Ur $ 528 V 0% ; 45 Hz 65 Hz 0%
460 V 0% $ UG $ 740 V 0%
27.0
44.0
53.0
78.0
100.0
43.5
-

Motor power (4-pole
(
ASM))
Pr [kW]
11.0
15.0
Pr [hp]
15.0
20.5
Output power UVW (8 kHz*)
S r8 [kVA]
16.3
22.2
PDC [kW]
0
10.0
Output current (8 kHz*)1)
Ir8 [A]
23.5
32.0
Output current (16 kHz*)1)
Ir16 [A]
15.3
20.8
max output current (8 kHz*)
Imax8 [A]
35.3
48.0
max output current (16 kHz*)
Imax16 [A]
23.0
31.2
max standstill current (8 kHz*)
I08 [A]
23.5
32.0
max standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A]
15,3
20.8
EVS9332ES
EVS9332ES
22.0
30.0
32.6
4.0
47.0
30.6
70.5
45.9
47.0
30.6
30.0
40.0
40.9
0
59.0
38.0
88.5
57.0
52.0
33.0
45.0
60.0
61.6
5.0
89.0
58.0
133.5
87.0
80.0
45.0
55.0
73.5
76.2
0
110.0
70.0
165.0
105.0
110.0
70.0

Motor power (4-pole
(
ASM))
Pr [kW]
11.0
18.5
30.0
37.0
45.0
55.0
Pr [hp]
15.0
25.0
40.0
49.5
60.0
73.5
Output power UVW (8 kHz*)
S r8 [kVA]
18.5
25.0
37.0
46.6
69.8
87.3
2)
Output power + UG, -UG
PDC [kW]
0
12.0
4.8
0
6.0
0
Ir8 [A]
22.3
30.4
44.7
56.0
84.0
105.0
Ir16 [A]
14.5
19.2
28.2
35.0
55.0
65.0
Imax8 [A]
33.5
45.6
67.1
84.0
126.0
157.5
21.8
28.8
42.3
52.5
82.5
97.5
I08 [A]
22.3
30.4
44.7
49.0
72.0
105.0
max Stillstandsstrom (16 kHz*)
I016 [A]
14.5
19.2
28.2
25.0
36.0
58.0
Motor voltage
U M [V]
0-3
UMains
Power loss
Pv [W]
360
430
640
810
1100
1470
Power derating
[%/K]
at 40 C < Ta < 55 C: 2,5%/K (no UL approval)
[%/m]
1000 m a.m.s.l. h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5%/1000m
Weight
m [kg]
7.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
36.5
59.0
135.0
-
75.0
100.0
100.5
0
145.0
90.0
217.5
135.0
126.0
72.0
90.0
120.0
104.0
6.0
125.0
80.0
187.5
120.0
111.0
58.0
1960
59.0
1)
The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and 2
minutes base load with 75% Irx .
2) When operated under rated load the controller can supply this power in addition.
*
Chopping frequency of the inverter (C0018)
9300BA0998
3-5
Technical Data
3.3.4
Fuses and cable cross-sections

Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE/ motor connection U, V, W
Type
yp
Operation without mains filter

Fuse
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9328
9329
9330
VDE
M 6A
M 6A
M 10A
M 32A
M 63A
-
9331 -
Input + UG, -UG
Operation with mains filter
E.l.c.b.
Cable
Fuse
cross-section2)
UL
5A
5A
10A
25A
63A
-
VDE
B 6A
B 6A
B 10A
B 32A
-
mm2
E.l.c.b.
1
1
1.5
6
16
-
AWG
17
17
15
9
6
-
VDE
M 6A
M 6A
M 10A
M 10A
M 20A
M 32A
35A
50A
80A
100A
UL
5A
5A
10A
10A
20A
25A
35A
50A
80A
100A
VDE
B 6A
B 6A
B 10A
B 10A
B 20A
B 32A
-
125A
125 A -
Cable
Fuse
cross-section
Cable
cross-section
2)
2)
mm2
1
1
1.5
1.5
4
6
10
16
25
50
AWG
17
17
15
15
11
9
7
5
3
0
mm2
6.3A
1
6.3A
1
8A
1.5
12A
1.5
20A
4
40A
6
50A
10
80A
16
100A
25
2 * 80A 1) 2 *
16
AWG
17
17
15
15
11
9
7
5
3
2*5
70
2/0
2 * 100A
2*
25
2*3
3 * 80A 1) 3 *
16
3*5
1)
9332 -
1)
2)
160A
175 A -
95
3/0
The DC bus fuses are connected in parallel

The valid local regulations have to be considered
For the operation of the controllers in a UL-approved plant:

- Use only UL-approved fuses and fuse holders:
- 500 V to 600 V in the mains input (AC)
- 700 V in the DC bus circuit
- Activation characteristic H or K5
- Use only UL-approved cables
Tip!
UL approved fuses and fuse holders can be obtained from e.g. Bussmann or
Ferraz.
Connection of the motor cables

- For functional reasons, the motor cables need not to be protected by fuses.
- Refer to the data listed in the table Operation with mains filter.
3-6
9300BA0998
Technical Data
3.3.5
Mains filters
Ratings (uk 6%)
Type
yp
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9328
9329
9330
9331
9332
Mains current
1.5 A
2.5 A
4A
7A
13 A
24 A
30 A
42 A
54 A
80 A
100 A
135 A
Inductance
24 mH
15 mH
9 mH
5 mH
3 mH
1.5 mH
1.1 mH
0.8 mH
0.6 mH
0.42 mH
0.34 mH
0.25 mH
Lenze order number

for RFI degree A
EZN3A2400H002
EZN3A1500H003
EZN3A0900H004
EZN3A0500H007
EZN3A0300H013
EZN3A0150H024
EZN3A0110H030
EZN3A0080H042
EZN3A0060H054
EZN3A0042H080
EZN3A0034H100
EZN3A0025H135
for RFI degree B

EZN3B2400H002
EZN3B1500H003
EZN3B0900H004
EZN3B0500H007
EZN3B0300H013
EZN3B0150H024
EZN3B0110H030
EZN3B0080H042
EZN3B0060H054
EZN3B0042H080
EZN3B0034H100
EZN3B0025H135
The mains filters for RFI degree B contain additional RFI suppression components.
3.4
Dimensions
Thedimensions of thecontroller depend on themechanicalinstallation (seechapter
4.1)
9300BA0998
3-7
Technical Data
3-8
9300BA0998
Installation
Installation
4.1
Mechanical installation
4.1.1
Important notes
- Use the controllers only as built-in devices!
- If the cooling air contains pollutants (dust, fluff, grease, aggressive gases):
- take suitable preventive measures , e.g. separate air duct, installation of
filters, regular cleaning, etc.
- Observe free space!
- You can install several controllers next to each other without free space in a
control cabinet.
- Ensure unimpeded ventilation of cooling air and outlet of exhaust air!
- Allow a free space of 100 mm at the top and at the bottom.
- Do not exceed the permissible ambient temperature during operation (see
chapter 3.2)
- With continuous oscillations or vibrations:
- Check whether shock absorbers are necessary.
Possible mounting positions
- Vertically on the control cabinet back panel with mains connections at the
top:
- with enclosed fixing rails or fixing brackets (see chapter 4.1.2)
- thermally separated with external heat sink
Punching see chapter 4.1.3
Cold Plate see chapter 4.1.4
9300BA0998
4-1
Installation
4.1.2
Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets
B
FIG 4-1
Dimensions for assembly with fixing rails/fixing brackets
Type
9321, 9322
9323, 9324
9325, 9326
9327, 9328,
9329
Fig.
A
A
B
C
a
78
97
135
250
b
384
384
384
402
b1
350
350
350
350
c
39
48,5
21,5
22
c1
92
206
d
365
365
365
370
d1
24
e*
250
250
250
250
e1
230
230
230
230
g
6,5
6,5
6,5
6,5
k
30
30
30
24
m
11
9330
9331,9332
C
C
340
450
672
748,5
591
680
28,5
30,5
283
389
624
702
38
38
285
285
265
265
11
11
28
28
18
18
When using a plug-on fieldbus module:

Observe the free space required for the connection cables
All dimensions in mm
Controllers 9321 to 9326

- Assembly preparation:
- Take out fixing rail(s) (accessory kit in the box) and mount on the controller
housing
Controllers 9327 to 9332
- Remove cover:
- Loosen screws (X)
- Swing cover to the top and detach.
- Take accessory kit out of the interior of the controller
- Assembly preparation:
- Take out fixing bracket and screws (accessory kit) and mount on the
controller housing
4-2
9300BA0998
Installation
4.1.3
Assembly with thermally separated power stage

(punching)
You can mount the heat sink of the controllers 9321 to 9326 outside the control
cabinet to reduce the heat in the control cabinet.For this, you need an assembly
frame with seal (can be ordered from Lenze).
- Distribution of the power loss:
- approx. 65% via the separated heatsink (heatsink + blower)
- approx. 35% inside the controller
- The enclosure of the separated heatsink (heatsink + blower) is IP41.
- The rated data of the controller is still valid.
Preparation for assembly:
1. Lay the halves of the assembly frame into the slot provided on the
controller.
2. Push the frame halves together until the ends catch.
3. Slip the seal over the heat sink and lay into the slot provided.
9300BA0998
4-3
Installation
Lenze
d1
b1 b
d1
c
c1
a
FIG 4-2
Type
9321, 9322
9323, 9324
9325, 9226
a
112.5
131.5
135
*
Dimensions for assembly with thermally separated power stage

b
385.5
385.5
385.5
b1
350
350
350
c
60
79
117
c1
95.5
114.5
137.5
d
365.5
365.5
365.5
d1
105.5
105.5
105.5
e*
250
250
250
f
92
92
92

Assembly cut-out
Type
Height
Width
9321, 9322
82 (3)
All dimensions in mm
4-4
9300BA0998
9323, 9324
350 (3)
101 (3)
9325, 9326
139 (3)
g
6.5
6.5
6.5
Installation
4.1.4
Assembly of variants
Variant EVS932XCSV003 (Cold Plate)
For installation in the control cabinet with other heat sinks as Cold Plate
Technique.
Lenze
b1
Lenze
d b b1
Lenze
d b
b1
d b
c2
FIG 4-3
Type
9321V003
9322V003
9323V003
9324V003
9325V003
9326V003
c
a
Dimensions 9321 ... 9326 when assembled as Cold Plate
b1
c1
e*
78
381
350
48
367
168
6,5
97
381
350
67
367
168
6.5
135
381
350
105
38
367
168
6,5

All dimensios in mm
9300BA0998
4-5
Installation
*)
b1
c
c1
a
a1
FIG 4-4
Type
9327V003
9328V003
*
Dimensions 9327 and 9328 when assembled as Cold Plate
a1
b1
c1
e*
234
250
381
350
110
220
367
171
6.5

All dimensios in mm
4-6
9300BA0998
Installation
- Observe the following points to comply with the technical data:

- Ensure sufficient ventilation of the heat sink.
- The free space behind the control cabinet back panel must be at least 500
mm.
- If you install several controllers in the control cabinet:
- Do not install the controllers on top of each other.
- The cooling path must not exceed the thermal resistances in the table:
Controller
Type
9321V003
9322V003
9323V003
9324V003
9325V003
9326V003
9327V003
9328V003
Cooling path
Power to be dissipated Pv [W]
80
80
100
155
210
360
410
610
R thmaxheat sink [K/ W]

0.50
0.50
0.40
0.25
0.19
0.10
0.09
0.06
- The temperature of the cold plate must not exceed +85 C.

- Penetration depth t of the screws into the base plate of the controller:
PP $ W $ PP
- For the bore pattern and surface quality of the heat sink please consult the
factory.
- Apply heat conductive compound to the cold plate of the controller.
9300BA0998
4-7
Installation
4.2
Electrical installation
For information on the installation according to EMC see chapter 4.3.
4.2.1
Protection of persons
Danger!
All power terminals carry voltage up to 3 minutes after mains disconnection.
Symbol on the RCCB
Meaning
AC sensitive RCCB, type AC
pulsating-current sensitive RCCB, type A
universal-current sensitive RCCB, type B
Protection of persons and

animals
DIN VDE 0100 with residual-current-operated circuit brakes (RCCB):

- The controllers have an internal mains rectifier. In case of a short-circuit to frame, a DC fault
current can prevent the activation of the AC-sensitive or pulse-current sensitive RCCB and thus
prevent the protective function for all electrical equipment operated on this RCCB. We therefore
recommend:
- pulse-current sensitive RCCB in systems with 820X controllers (L1/N).
- universal current RCCB in systems with 821X/822X/824X controllers (L1/L2/L3).
Rated fault current
Observe the rated fault current for the selection of the RCCB.
The RCCB may cause false tripping because of
- capacitive leakage currents between cable screens (especially with long screened motor cables),
- the mains connection of several controllers at the same time,
- use of RFI filters.
Installation
You can install RCCBs only between the supplying mains and the controller.
Note for the use of

universal-current sensitive
RCCBs
- Universal-current sensitive RCCBs have been defined in the European standard EN 50178 (as of
October 1997) for the first time. The EN 50178 was harmonized and has been effective since
October 1997. It supersedes the national standard VDE 0160. Universal-current sensitive RCCBs
are also described in the IEC 755.
- RCCBs with a rated fault current of
- 30 mA are suitable only in systems with 820X controllers.
- 300 mA are suitable only in systems with controllers 821X/822X/824X.
Mains isolation / Protection The control inputs and outputs of all controllers are mains isolated. Please observe the description
of the protection against contact on the following page.
against contact
Replace defective fuses
Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is applied.
- For single drives, the controller carries a hazardous voltage up to three minutes after mains
disconnection.
- In a drive network, all controllers must be inhibited and disconnected from the mains.
Disconnect controller from

the mains
4-8
9300BA0998
Make a safety connection between the controller and mains only via a contactor at the input side!
- Please note that in a drive network all controllers must be inhibited.
Installation
Insulation
The controllers have an insulation (isolating distance)between the power terminals
and the control terminals as well as to the housing:
- Terminals X1 and X5 have a double basic insulation (double isolating
distance, safe insulation according to VDE0160, EN50178). The protection
against contact is ensured without any further measures.
Danger!
- Terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10 have a simple basic insulation (simple
isolating distance).
- Protection against contact in case of fault is ensured only by additional
measures.
- If an external voltage supply (24V DC) is used, the insulation level of the
controller depends on the insulation level of the voltage source.
reinforced insulation
simple basic insulation
FIG 4-5
Basic insulation on the controller
9300BA0998
4-9
Installation
4.2.2
Protection of the controller

Stop!
The controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components.
- Prior to assembly and service operations, the personnel must be free of
electrostatic charge:
- Discharging is possible by touching the PE fixing screw or another
grounded metal part in the control cabinet.
- Length of the screws for the connection of the screen cable/screen plate for
the types 9327 to 9332:
< 12 mm
- The controller is protected external fuses (see chapter 3.3.4)
- Cover unused control inputs and outputs with plugs or with protective
covers (included in the scope of supply) for the Sub-D inputs.
- Frequent mains switching only overload the internal switch-on current
limitation.For cyclic mains switching, the controller can be switched on every
three minutes as a maximum.
- Operate the controller types 9324, 9326 and 9328 only with a suitable mains
mains filter (see chapter 3.3.5).
- In case of condensation, connect the controller to the mains voltage only
after the visible humidity has evaporated.
4.2.3
Motor protection
- Complete motor protection according to VDE:
- By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring
- Required for group drives
(motors connected in parallel to a controller)
- We recommend to use a PTC or thermostat with PTC characteristic
(Thermostats are standard in Lenze AC motors) for temperature monitoring
of the motor.
- When using motors with insulation which is not suitable for inverter
operation:
- Please contact your motor supplier.
Lenze AC motors are designed for inverter operation.
- With the corresponding parameter setting, the controllers generate field
frequencies up to 600 Hz:
- When operating inappropriate motors, dangerous overspeeds may occur
and result in the destruction of the motor.
4-10
9300BA0998
Installation
4.2.4
Mains types/Mains conditions

Please observe the restrictions of each mains type!
Mains
With grounded neutral
(TT/TN mains)
Operation of the controllers

No restrictions
Notes
Observe controller ratings
- observe the load of the shared
N-conductor.
- r.m.s.
r m s mains current see chapter 3.3
33
- possibly enlarge the cross-section of the
N-conductor
With isolated neutral (IT

mains)
Possible if the controller is protected in

the event of an earth fault in the
supplying mains
- by suitable equipment detecting the
earth fault and
- the controller is directly disconnected
from the mains
The operation is possible only with one
variant
The DC voltage must be symmetrical to
PE
A safe operation is not ensured at the

inverter output in the event of an earth fault
With grounded phase

DC supply via + UG/-UG
4.2.5
Contact Lenze
Controller will be distroyed when grounding
+ UGconductor or -UG conductor
Interactions with compensation equipment

- Cotnrollers only consume a very small fundamental reactive power from the
AC mains. A compensation is therefore not necessary.
- If you operate controllers on mains with compensation equipment you have
to use chokes for this equipment.
- Please consult the supplier of compensation equipment.
4.2.6
Specification of the cables used

- The cables used must comply with the required approvals of the application
(eg. UL).
- The prescribed minimum cross-sections of PE conductors must be
maintained in all cases. The cross-section of the PE conductor must be at
least as large as the cross-section of the power connections.
- The screening quality of a cable is determined by
- a good screen connection
- a low screen resistance
Only use screens with tin-plated or nickel-plated copper braids!
Screens of steel braid are not suitable.
- the contact ratio of the screen braid:
at least 70 % to 80 % with cover angle 90
9300BA0998
4-11
Installation
4.2.7
Power connections
Controller
9321 ... 9326
Preparation for the power connection

- Remove the covers of the power connections:
- Unlatch to the front by gentle pressure.
- Pull upwards (mains connection) or downwards (motor connection).
9327 ... 9332
- Remove cover:
- Loosen screws (X) (see FIG 4-1).

- Swing cover to the top and detach.
- Take accessory kit out of the interior of the controller.
4.2.7.1
Mains connection
Types 9321 to 9326
Types 9327 to 9332
+UG
L1
L2
L3
+UG
PE
Correct screen connection with screened cables

(required parts in the accessory kit):
- Bolt screen plate to fixing bracket .
- Fix screen using cable lugs. Do not use as a strain
relief!
- To improve the screen connection: Connect screen
additionally at the stud next to the power connections.
FIG 4-6
4-12
9300BA0998
L1
L2
L3
-UG
-UG
Proposal for a mains connection
PE
Correct screen connection with screened cables:

- Connect the screen with suitable clamp on the
conducting control cabinet mounting plate.
- To improve the screen connection: Connect screen
additionally at the stud next to the power connections.
Installation
- Connect mains cables to the screw terminals L1, L2, L3.

- Connect cables for brake unit (935X), supply module (934X) or further
controllers in the DC bus connection to the screw terminals +UG, -UG at the
top of the controller.
- Max. permissible cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques:
Terminals
Type
9321 - 9326
9327 - 9329
9330 - 9331
9332
max. permissible
cable cross-sections
4 mm2 1)
25 mm2 2)
95 mm2 2)
120 mm2 2)
L1, L2, L3, + UG, -UG
PE connection
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

3.4 Nm (30 lbin)
4 Nm (35 lbin)
7 Nm (62 lbin)
12 Nm (106.2 lbin)
1)
with plug connector: 6 mm 2

with wire crimp cap: 4 mm2
2) with ring cable lug: Cross-section is limited only by the cable duct in the housing
Fuses
Fuses and cable cross-sections
The specifications in Chapter 3.3.4 are recommendations and refer to the

use
- in control cabinets and machines
- installation in the cable duct
- max. ambient temperature + 40 C.
Selection of the cable

cross-section
Consider the voltage drop under load (acc. to DIN 18015 part1: $ 3 %) for
the selection.
Protection of the cables and the - By standard commercial fuses.

controller on the AC side (L1, L2, - Fuses in UL-conform plant must have a UL approval.
L3):
- The rated voltages of the fuses must be dimensioned according to the
mains voltage at the site. The activation characteristic is defined by H or
K5.
Protection of the cables and the
controller on the DC side (+ UG,
-UG):
- By means of recommended DC fuses.

- The fuses/fuse holders recommended by Lenze are all UL approved.
For DC group drives or supply

by means of a DC source
Please observe the notes in part F of the systems manual.
Connection of a brake unit
If the brake unit is connected to the terminals + UG/-UG, the fuses and
cross-sections listed in chapter 3.3.4 are not valid. These unit-specific data
can be obtained from the technical documentation of the brake unit.
Further information
For the protection of the cables and the controller, plese refer to Chapter
Accessories.
Other standards
The compliance with other standards (e.g.: VDE 0113, VDE 0289, etc.) is in
the responsibility of the user.
9300BA0998
4-13
Installation
4.2.7.2
Motor connection
We recommend the use of screened motor cables only, because of the EMC safety.
Tip!
The screening of the motor cable is only required to comply with existing standards
(e.g. VDE 0160, EN 50178).
Types 9321 to 9326
T1 T2
W
U V
V W
U
PE
Correct screen connection with screened cables

(required parts in the accessory kit):
- Bolt screen plate to fixing bracket .
- Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal
contact. Do not use as a strain relief!
- To improve the screen connection: Connect
screens additionally at the stud PE next to the
motor connections.
Types 9327 to 9329
PE
T1
T2
4-14
9300BA0998
Correct screen connection with screened cables:

- Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal
contact. Do not use as a strain relief!
- To improve the screen connection: Connect
screens additionally at the stud PE next to the
motor connections.
Installation
Types 9330 and 9331

- Carry out strain relief using cable binders.
- Correct screen connection with screened cables:
PE
T1
- Apply motor cable screen to the screening

plate using clamp and screws M5x12.
- Connect thermal contact screen at the stud PE
next to the motor connections over a large
surface.
T2
M5 X 12
Type 9332
- Carry out strain relief using clamps and screws
PE
T1
T2
M4 X 12
M5 X 12
FIG 4-7
M4x12.
- An additional strain relief/fixing is possible with
cable binders..
- Correct screen connection with screened cables:
- Apply motor cable screen to the screening
plate using clamp and screws M5x12.
- Connect thermal contact screen at the stud PE
next to the motor connections over a large
surface.
Proposal for the motor connection
- Observe the max. permissible length of the motor cable:

Ur = 400 V (+ 10%)
Type
9321/9322
9323 - 9332
f chop = 8 kHz
up to 50 m
up to 50 m
f chop = 16 kHz
up to 45 m
up to 50 m
Ur = 480 V (+ 10%)
f chop = 8 kHz
up to 50 m
up to 50 m
f chop = 16 kHz
up to 25 m
up to 50 m
9300BA0998
4-15
Installation
- Connect motor cables to the screw terminals U, V, W.

- Observe correct pole connection.
- Max. permissible cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques:
Terminals
Type
max. permissible
cable cross-sections
9321 - 9326
4 mm2 1)
9327 - 9329
9330 - 9331
25 mm2 2)
95 mm2 2)
9332
120 mm2 2)
U, V, W
PE
connection
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

3.4 Nm
(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)
(30 lbin)
4 Nm (35 lbin)
7 Nm (62 lbin)
12 Nm (106.2 lbin)
Screen/
Strain relief
T1, T2
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)
3.4 Nm (30 lbin)

0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
M4: 1.7 Nm (15 lbin) (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)
M5: 3.4 Nm (30 lbin)
1)
with plug connector: 6 mm 2

with wire crimp cap: 4 mm2
2) with ring cable lug: Cross-section is limited only by the cable duct in the housing
Tip!
Switching on the motor side of the controller is permitted only for emergeny
switch-off.
4.2.7.3
Connection of a brake unit

- When connecting a brake unit (brake module with internal brake resistor or
brake chopper with external brake resistor) observe the corresponding
Operating Instructions in all cases.
Stop!
- Design the circuit so that, if the temperature monitoring of the brake unit is
activated,
- the controllers are inhibited (X5/28 = LOW).
- the mains is disconnected.
Example see Chapter 4.3 or FIG 4-8.
4-16
9300BA0998
Installation
4.2.7.4
DC bus connection of several drives

Decentralized supply with brake module
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
OFF
F1 F2 F3
K1
F4 F5 F6
Z4
RB
ON
Z1
Z2
RB
K1
F7
RB1 RB2
PE
+UG -UG
L1
9352
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F9 F10
F8
L1
-UG
L2
932X - 933X
L3
PE
+UG
-UG
932X - 933X
Z3
U
PE
PE
28
PE
A4
K1
28
A4
K1
X2
X1
RFR
RFR
M
PE
FIG 4-8
Z1, Z2
Z3
Z4
F1...F5
K1
PE
3~
PE
3~
K35.0113
Decentralized supply for DC bus connection of several drives`

Mains filter (for dimensioning see systems manual, part F)
Brake chopper
Brake resistor (for r.m.s. current monitoring see systems manual, part F)
Fuse (see Chapter 3.3.4 and 4.2.7.1)
Main contactor
Stop!
- Set the DC bus voltage thresholds of controller and brake unit to the same
values.
- Controller using C0173
- Brake unit using switches S1 and S2
- A bimetal relais is required for the monitoring of the mains supply.
Tip!
Please observe the specifications in part F of the systems manual and the
application report DC bus connection for the dimensioning and rating of the
components.
9300BA0998
4-17
Installation
Central supply with supply module

- When connecting the supply module, the corresponding operating
instructions must be observed.
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1...F3
Z1
F4
L1
L2
L3
PE
+UG
9341 - 9343
-UG
F6
F5
L1
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F7
-UG
F8
L1
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F9
-UG
932X - 933X
932X - 933X
PE
PE
Z2
U
M
PE
FIG 4-9
Z1
Z2
F1...F5
K1
3~
M
PE
3~
K35.0114
Central supply for DC bus connection of several drives

Mains filter
Supply module
Fuses (see Chapter 3.3.4 and 4.2.7.1)
Main contactor
Tip!
If the power supply of the supply module is not sufficient, a parallel supply can be
installed via the mains input of a controller (see systems manual, part F). In this case,
the controller can only be operated with the assigned mains filters (at least acc. to
limit value class A).
4-18
9300BA0998
Installation
4.2.8
Control connections
4.2.8.1
Control cables
- Connect control cables to the screw terminals
max. permissible cable cross-section
1.5 mm2
Screw-tightening torques
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)
- We recommend a one-side screening of all cables for analog signals
to avoid signal distortion.

- Connect the screens of the control cables
- with the collective screen plate to the front metal surface (max.
screw length 12 mm).
Assignment of the control terminals

Protection against inverse polarity
- This protection prevents the wrong connection of the internal control inputs.It
is however possible to overcome the protection against polarity reversal by
applying great force.
FIG 4-10
63 7 4 3 59 STSTA4A3A2A1
39 E5E4E3E2E128
GND
LOHI
Overview
62 7 2 1
4.2.8.2
X4
X5
X6
Layout of the control connections on the front of the controller
9300BA0998
4-19
Installation
Analog
inputs
Terminal Use
(Default setting is printed in bold)
1, 2
Difference input master voltage
(Main speed setpoint)
6
4
2
5
3
1
level
Data
-10 V to + 10 V
Resolution:
5 mV (11 bit + sign)
-20 mA to + 20 mA
Resolution:
20 A (10 bit + sign)
-10 V to + 10 V
Resolution:
Resolution:
Resolution:
LOW: 0 + 4 V
HIGH: + 13 + 30 V
Jumper X3
Difference input master current
3, 4
Analog
outputs
out
uts
62
63
Digital
g
i
inputs
7
28
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
Digital
outputs
A1
A2
A3
A4
39
59
6
4
2
5
3
1
Jumper X3
Difference input master voltage
Jumper X3 has not
effect
(Additional speed setpoint)
Monitor 1
(Actual speed)
Monitor 2
(Torque setpoint)
Internal ground, GND
Controller enable (RFR)
freely assignable
(remove CW rotation / QSP)
freely assignable
(remove CCW rotation / QSP)
freely assignable
(enable JOG-setpoint 1)
freely assignable
(TRIP set)
freely assignable
(reset fault - TRIP-reset)
freely assignable
(TRIP)
freely assignable
(nact < nx)
freely assignable
(RDY)
freely assignable
(M max)
Ground of the digital inputs and outputs
Supply input of the control module:
24 V external (I > 1A)
-10 V to + 10 V;
max. 2 mA
-10 V to + 10 V;
max. 2 mA
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
LOW:
HIGH:
G
0 +4 V
+ 133 + 30 V
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
-
To change the jumper, remove plug-on module, if necessary.
9300BA0998
Reading and writing of the inputs:

once per ms (average value)
LOW@HIGH edge
Tip!
4-20
IInputt currentt att 24 V:

V
8 mA per input
Output current:
max. 50 mA
A per output
t t
(external resistance at least 480
at 24 V)
Updating of the outputs:
once per
er ms
Installation
4.2.8.3
Connecting diagrams
Connection of analog signals
Analog signals are connected via the 2 4-pole terminal block X6.
Depending on the use of the analog inputs, the jumper of X3 must be set
accordingly.
100k
100k
Connection for external voltage supply

STOP!
- The maximum permitted voltage difference between an external
voltage source and theGND1 (terminal X6/7) of the controller is
10V (common mode).
- The maximum permitted voltage difference between GND1
(terminal X6/7) and the PE of the controller is 50V.
93XX
100k
100k
242R
X3
GND1
GND1 U
3,3nF
2
X6
62
63
GND1
=
+
242R
93XX
100k
100k
X6
GND1
Limit the voltage difference

- by overvoltage clamping components or
- by direct connection of terminal(s) X6/2, X6/4 and X6/7 to
GND1 and PE (see diagram).
3,3nF
X6
=
+
Configuration of the internal voltage supply:

- Set a freely assignable analog output (AOUTx) to HIGH level.
- For example terminal X6/63: Assign C0436 with FIXED100%
(see chapter 5.7.4 ). 10V are thus applied across terminal
X6/63.
100k
100k
Connection for internal voltage supply
93XX
100k
100k
242R
X3
GND1
GND1 U
3,3nF
2
X6
62
63
GND1
10k
10k
X6
Tip!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined
configurations in C0005.The output is assigned automatically with
FIXED100% (corresponds to 10 at output X6/63) by C0005 =
XX1X (e. g. 1010 for speed control via terminals).
9300BA0998
4-21
Installation
Connection of digital signals

Analog signals are connected via the 2 4-pole terminal block X5.
The levels of the digital inputs and outputs are PLC compatible.
Only use relays with low-current contacts for the switching of the signal cables
(recommendation: relays with gold-plated contacts).
Connection for external voltage supply
G
N D
2
2 4 V
_
9 3 X X
X 5
E 1
2 8
E 2
E 4
P ro c e s s o r
b o a rd
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
1 0 R
5 0 m A
3 k
3 k
3 k
E 3
E 5
A 1
3 9
A 2
A 3
A 4
N D
5 9
L
R
R F R
3 k
3 k
3 k
3 k
2 2 k
=
+
2 4 V
Q
S P
J O
T R IP
T R IP S e t/R e s e t
G
M
R
|n s e t| < n x
m
D
a x
Y
The external voltage source supplies the digital inputs and

outputs.
- If the external supply voltage is also to be used as an alternative
supply of the control electronics (backup operation in case of
mains failure):
- For this, make the connection illustrated as a broken line.
- The external voltage source must be able to drive a current
> 1A.
This ensures that all actual values, even after mains
disconnection, are still detected and processed.
- Connection of the external voltage source:
- supply voltage at X5/59
- external ground at X5/39
STOP!
The maximum permitted voltage difference between GND2
(terminal X5/39) and the PE of the controller is 50V.
Limit the voltage difference
- by overvoltage clamping components or
- by a direct PE connection of terminal 39 (see figure).
93XX
A1 A2
E5 39
_
=
+
Connection for internal voltage supply

N D
2
2 4 V
_
=
9 3 X X
R F R
5 0 m A
A 2
A 3
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
3 k
3 k
3 k
3 k
3 k
A 1
P ro c e s s o r
b o a rd
G
2 8
E 1
E 2
E 3
E 4
E 5
3 9
A 4
5 9
L
R
F IX E D 1
S P
J O
4-22
1 0 R
5 0 m A
X 5
3 k
3 k
2 2 k
9300BA0998
T R IP S e t/R e s e t
|n s e t| < n x
a x
N D
Configuration of the internal voltage supply

- Set a freely assignable digital output (DIGOUTx) to HIGH level.
- For example terminal X5/A1: Assign C0117/1 with FIXED1 (see
Chapter 5.7.2). 24V are thus applied across terminal X5/A1.
Tip!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined
configurations in C0005.The output is assigned automatically with
FIXED1 (corresponds to 24 V at terminal X5/A1) by C0005 =
XX1X (e. g. 1010 for speed control via terminals).
Installation
Digital frequency input (X9) / Digital frequency output (X10)
Tip!
For the connection to the digital frequency input (X9) or digital frequency output
(X10), use prefabricated Lenze cables. Otherwise, only use cables with twisted
pairs and screened wires (A, A / B, 6.5 / Z, Z ) (see connection diagram).
'LJLWDO IUHTXHQF\ RXWSXW ;

Features:
- Sub-D female connector, 9-pole
- Output frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
- Current load per channel: max. 20 mA
- Two-track with inverse 5 V signals and zero track
- X10 has a different basic setting depending on the selected
configuration (C0005)
- Default setting:
Encoder simulation of the resolver signal
- Capacity:
- A maximum of 3 slaves can be connected in parallel
connection.
- For series connection any number of slaves can be
connected.
- When PIN 8 (EN) shows a LOW level, the master is initialized
(e.g. if the mains was disconnected). The slave can thus
monitor the master.
M
a s te r
'LJLWDO IUHTXHQF\ LQSXW ;

Features:
- Sub-D male connector, 9-pole
- Input frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
- Current consumption per channel: max. 6 mA
- Two-track with inverse 5 V signals and zero track
- Possible input signals:
- Incremental encoder with two 5V complementary signals
shifted by 905(TTL encoder)
- Encoder simulation of the master
- PIN 8 serves to monitor the cable or the connected controller:
- When this PIN shows a LOW level, the SD3 monitoring
responds.
- If the monitoring is not required, this input can be connected
to + 5V.
- The input is disconnected at C0540 = 0, 1, 2 or 3.
S la v e
X 9
X 1 0
m m
0 .1 4
4
5
G N D
8
9
L a m p
c o n tro l
8
C
a b le
le n g t h
a x . 5 0
9 p o le S u b - D c o n n e c to r
Pin assignment X10

1
2
3
6.5
A
A
4
5
+ 5 V GND
F o r C
2 6
r o ta t io n
A W G
G N D
e n a b le
0 .5
2 0
0 .1 4
2 6
0 .5
2 0
0 .1 4
2 6
B
B
Z
Z
9 p o le S u b - D m a le c o n n e c to r
6
Z
7
Z
8
EN
9
6.5
Pin assignment X9
1
2
3
6.5
A
A
4
5
+ 5 V GND
6
Z
7
Z
8
LC
9
B
9300BA0998
4-23
Installation
State bus (X5/ST)

The state bus is a controller-specific bus system for simple monitoring in a network
of drives:
- Controls all networked drives in a preselected state (see systems manual).
- Up to 20 controllers can be connected.
- Connection of the state bus cables to terminals X5/ST.
Stop!
Do not apply an external voltage across terminals X5/ST.
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
OFF
K1
F1
F1
Z1
F1
Z1
Z1
ON
K1
F2
L1
L3
L2
PE
F3
F2
L1
+UG -UG
93XX - 93XX
PE
ST 39 ST
PE
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F3
F2
-UG
L1
93XX - 93XX
A4
PE
ST 39 ST
PE
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F3
-UG
93XX - 93XX
A4
PE
ST 39 ST
PE
K1
K1
K1
RFR
RFR
RFR
28
A4
K35.0122
FIG 4-11
Monitoring of a network of drives with the state bus

Z1
Mains filter
F1...F5
Fuses (see Chapter 3.3.4 and 4.2.7.1)
K1
Main contactor
Tip!
For further information on the state bus as well as possible applications and
commissioning please consult the systems manual.
4-24
9300BA0998
Installation
System bus connection (X4)

K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
OFF
K1
F1 F2 F3
F1 F2 F3
Z1
F1
Z1
F2 F3
Z1
ON
K1
L1
L3
L2
PE
L1
+UG -UG
932X - 933X
PE
LO GND PE
HI
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
-UG
L1
932X - 933X
A4
PE
HI LO GND
PE
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
-UG
932X - 933X
PE
A4
HI
LO GND PE 28
A4
RA2
RA1
K1
K1
K1
RFR
RFR
RFR
K35.0123
FIG 4-12
Wiring of the system bus

RA1, RA2
Bus terminating resistors 120 WW (included in the accessory kit)
- Connection via pluggable screw terminals (double terminals can be used).

- Only connect terminals of the same designation.
- Features of the system cable:
Total cable
length
up to 300 m
300 m to 1000 m
Cable type
LIYCY 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2

twisted-pair with screening
Pair 1: CAN-LOW (LO) and CAN-HIGH (HI)
Pair 2: 2*GND
40 /km
130 nF/km
CYPIMF 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2

twisted-pair with screening
Pair 1: CAN-LOW (LO) and CAN-HIGH (HI)
Pair 2: 2*GND
40 /km
60 nF/km
Cable resistance
Capacitance per
unit length
- Connection of the bus termination resistors:

- One resistor 120 W each on the first and last bus device.
- On the 93XX controller the resistor can be screwed directly under the
terminals X4/HI and X4/LO.
9300BA0998
4-25
Installation
Features:
- CAN-based with bus protocol according to CANopen
(CAL-based Communication Profile DS301)
- Bus expansion:
- 25 m for max. 1 Mbit/s baud rate
- up to 1 km with reduced baud rate
- Very reliable data transmission (Hamming distance = 6)
- Signal level according to ISO 11898
- Up to 63 bus devices are possible
- Access to all Lenze parameters
- Master functions are integrated into the controller
- Data exchange possible between controllers without participation of a
master system (current ratio control, speed synchronization, etc.)
The following connections of the system bus connection are possible:
- Connection to a decentral terminal extension for digital and analog inputs
and outputs
- Connection to a superimposed control (PLC, position control, operating
terminal)
- Connection between several controllers
Tip!
For further information on the system bus as well as possible applications and
commissioning please consult the systems manual.
Automation interface (X1)

The automation interface (X1) is used for the connection of different plug-on
modules
- Operating module
- field bus modules
- RS232, RS485, fibre optics, type 2102 (LECOM-A/B/LI),
- InterBus-S, type 2111
- PROFIBUS-DP, type 2131
4-26
9300BA0998
Installation
4.2.9
Motor temperature monitoring
Selection of the
sensor type
- Thermal sensor KTY
Other
monitoring types
KTY, PTC and TKO do not offer a complete protection. To improve the monitoring, Lenze recommends the
use of a bimetal relay.
- Linear thermal sensor in the motor winding

- standard in Lenze motors MDXKX and MDXQX
- PTC thermistor
- PTC thermistor with defined tripping characteristic
- Thermal contact TKO
- Thermostat/normally-closed contact
Alternative monitoring Comparators (CMP1 ... CMP3) monitor and a time element (TRANS1 ... TRANS4) limits the motor current
for small speeds or motor standstill.
You can also achieve this function by connecting suitable function blocks (see systems manual).
Reactions
Depending on the type of temperature monitoring, different reactions can be provoked (see chapter 8.5).
Stop!
Do not connect an external voltage to the inputs.
Motor
Lenze motors MDXKX and MDXQX
Connection
- Resolver input X7:
Lenze motors
Motors of other brands
with thermal sensor
with thermal contact
Terminals T1/T2 next to the terminals U, V, W
- pin X7/8 = PTC+ , pin X7/9 = PTCor

- encoder input X8:
Fault indication
Possible
reactions
i
Point of release
Notes
- pin X8/8 = PTC+ , pin X8/5 = PTC(MONIT-)OH3

(MONIT-)OH7
(MONIT-)OH8
The corresponding monitoring and thus the following codes are preset under C0086
- Trip (C0583 = 0) - Warning (C0584 = 2)
- Trip (C0585 = 0)
- OFF (C0583 = 3) - OFF (C0584 = 3)
- Warning (C0585 = 2)
- OFF (C0585 = 3)
fixed at 150o C
can be set under C0121
fixed, (depending on the PTC/thermal contact):
PTC: when RJ > 1600 W
- Monitoring is active in the factory setting.
- If resolver (X7) and encoder (X8) are operated
- Deactivate monitoring via X7
- We recommend a Ziehl PTC

or X8 under C0583= 3 and
(up to 150 C): K15301075
C0584= 3
or a thermostat.
together:
- The connection is done
- Enter characteristic (see
- Connect PTC only at one connector (X7 or
according to DIN 44081 (see
chapter 4.2.9.1)
X8)
also
FIG
4-13).
Deactivate monitoring via X7
- Do not connect PTC connection of the other
or X8 with C0583= 3 and
connector (do not short-circuit!)
C0584= 3
- For further information on the connection of
the thermal sensor please consult the
description of the corresponding feedback
system.
9300BA0998
4-27
Installation
Types 9321 to 9326
Types 9327 and 9330
Internal connection
24 V
X10
7,4k
3,3k
PE
T1 T2
PE
T1
T1
MONIT-OH8
U V W
2,7k
T2
T2
X6 7
93xx
Types 9330 and 9331
K350052
Type 9332
PE
PE
T1
T1
T2
T2
FIG 4-13
Connection of a thermal sensor to the terminals T1 and T2 and internal connection
Tip!
- In the prefabricated Lenze system cables for Lenze servo motors the cable
for the temperature feedback is already included. The cables are designed
for wiring according to EMC.
- If you use cables of your own:
- Always lay cables separately from motor cables.
4-28
9300BA0998
Installation
4.2.9.1
User-specific characteristic for a PTC thermistor

When using motors of other brands, you can establish a specific characteristic for
the PTC used.
Adjustment
- Set C1190 = 1
- Enter two values each under C1191 and
C1192 (see example).
- Define the values in a range in which the
highest accuracy is required.
R []
R2
(C1192/2)
R1
(C1192/1)
T1
(C1191/1)
4.2.10
T2
(C1191/2)
T [C]
Feedback systems
Different feedback systems can be connected to the controller:
- Resolver feedback (factory setting)
- Encoder feedback
- Incremental encoder TTL
- Sine-cosine encoder
- Sine cosine encoder with serial communication (single turn)
- Sine cosine encoder with serial communication (multi turn)
Resolver signal or encoder signal can be output at the digital frequency output X10
for slaves.
- Connection as shown in the figures:
- Use twisted pair cables and screened pair cables.
- Connect the screen at both ends.
- Use indicated cable cross-sections.
- The feedback system is activated under C0025.
Sensorless control SSC
Do not use sensorless control (SSC) for new applications (C0025 = 1).
Use a vector control EVF 9300 instead or contact Lenze.
9300BA0998
4-29
Installation
Resolver connection (X7)

- In all configurations predefined under C0005, a resolver can be used as
feedback system. An adjustment is not necessary.
Tip!
Use the prefabricated Lenze system cable for the resolver connection.
Features:
- 2-pin resolver (U = 10 V, f = 4 kHz)
- Resolver and resolver cable are monitored for open circuit (fault indication
Sd2)
X 7
C a b le le n g th m a x . 5 0 m
R e s o lv e r
+ R E F
-R E F
m m
2
A W G
0 .5
2 0
0 .1 4
2 6
3
+ C O S
-C O S
+ S IN
-S IN
+ P T C
-P T C
P T C
9 p o le S u b - D fe m a le c o n n e c to r
FIG 4-14
Resolver connection
Assignment of the female connector (X7)

Pin
1
2
3
Signal
+ Ref
-Ref
GND
X7/8 and X7/9 see chapter 4.2.9.
4-30
9300BA0998
4
+ COS
5
-COS
6
+ SIN
7
-SIN
8
+ PTC
9
-PTC
Installation
Encoder connection (X8)

An incremental encoder or a sine-cosine encoder can be connected to this input.
Tip!
Use the prefabricated Lenze system cable for the encoder connection.
- Under C0421, you can set the encoder supply voltage VCC5_E from 5 V to 8
V,
- to set the encoder supply
- to compensate the voltage drop on the encoder if necessary
DU 2 * cable length * resistance/m * Iencoder
Stop!
Observe the connection voltage of the encoder system used.An excessive setting
under C0421 can destroy the encoder.
C a b le le n g th m a x . 5 0 m
R e fS IN
0 .1 4
A
V
1 .0
5
Z
+ K T Y
+ K T Y
-K T Y
= 2 ,5 V
0 ,5 V
C O S
2 6
1 7
F o r C
0 ,5 V
= 2 ,5 V
r o ta t io n
-K T Y
R e fS IN
A W G
G N D
Z / + 4 8 5
R e fC O S
C C 5 _ E
Z / - 4 8 5
K T Y
m m
C O S
E n c o d e r
R e fC O S
G N D
S IN
S IN
V c c
X 8
0 .1 4
2 6
A
B
B
Z
9 p o le S u b - D m a le c o n n e c to r
FIG 4-15
Encoder connection
9300BA0998
4-31
Installation
Incremental encoder
Features:
- Incremental encoders with two 5 V complementary signals which are shifted
by 90 (TTL encoder) can be connected.
- The zero track can be connected (as option).
- 9-pole Sub-D female connector
- Input frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
- Current consumption per channel: 6 mA
Assignment of the male connector (X8)
Pin
1
2
3
Signal
6.5
A
A
4
V CC5_E
5
GND (-PTC)
6
Z
7
Z
8
+ PTC
9
B
X8/8 see chapter 4.2.9.
Sine-cosine encoder
Features:
- The following encoders can be connected
- Simple sine-cosine encoders with rated voltage 5 V to 8 V.
- Sine-cosine encoders with a communication interface of type Stegmann
SCS/M70xxx (The initialization time of the controller is increased to approx.
2 seconds).
(Die Initialisierungszeit des Antriebsreglers verlngert sich dadurch auf ca. 2
Sekunden).
- 9-pole Sub-D female connector
- Internal resistance Ri = 221 W
- Voltage sine and cosine track: 1 Vss p0.2 V
- Voltage RefSIN and RefCOS: +2.5 V
Tip!
For encoder with tracks: sine, sine and cosine, cosine:
Assign RefSIN with sine and RefCOS with cosine.
Assignment of the male connector (X8)

Pin
1
2
3
Signal
SIN
RefCOS COS
X8/8 see chapter 4.2.9.
4-32
9300BA0998
4
V CC5_E
5
GND (-PTC)
6
Z or -RS485
7
Z or + RS485
8
+ PTC
9
RefSIN
Installation
4.3
Installation of a CE-typical drive system
General
notes
- . The electromagnetic compatibility of a machine depends on the type of installation and care taken Please observe:
Assembly
Filters
- Assembly
- Filters
- Screening
- Grounding
For diverging installations, the conformity to the CE EMC Directive requires a check of the machine or system
regarding the EMC limit values. This is for instance valid for
- The use of unscreened cables
- The use of group RFI filters instead of assigned RFI filters
- Operation without mains filter
The compliance of the machine application with the EMC Directive is in the responsibility of the user.
- If you observe the following measures, you can assume that the machine will operate without any EMC problems
caused by the drive system, and that compliance with the EMC Directive and the EMC law is achieved.
- If devices which do not comply with the CE requirement concerning noise immunity EN 50082-2 are operated
close to the controller, these devices may be disturbed electromagnetically by the controllers.
Connect controller, mains choke, and mains filter to the grounded mounting plate with a wire of large a
cross-section as possible:
- Mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc-coated, stainless steel) allow permanent contact.
- Painted plates are not suitable for the installation in accordance to the EMC.
If you use several mounting plates:
- Connect as much surface as possible of the mounting plates (e.g. with copper bands).
Ensure the separation of motor cable and signal or mains cable.
Do not use the same terminal strip for mains input and motor output.
Cable guides as close as possible to the reference potential.Unguided cables have the same effect as aerials.
Use mains filters or RFI filters and mains chokes which are assigned to the controller:
- RFI filters reduce impermissible high-frequency interference to a permissible value.
- Mains chokes reduce low-frequency interferences which depend on the motor cable and its length.
- Mains filters combine the functions of mains choke and RFI filter.
9300BA0998
4-33
Installation
Screening
- Connect the screen of the motor cable to the controller
Grounding
4-34
9300BA0998
- to the screen connection of the controller.

- additionally to the mounting plate with a surface as large as possible.
- Recommendation: For the connection, use ground clamps on bare metal mounting surfaces.
If contactors, motor-protecting switches or terminals are located in the motor cable:
- Connect the screens of the connected cables also to the mounting plate, with a surface as large as possible.
Connect the screen in the motor terminal box or on the motor housing to PE:
- Metal glands at the motor terminal box ensure a connection of the screen and the motor housing.
If the mains cable between mains filter and controller is longer than 300mm:
- Screen mains cables.
- Connect the screen of the mains cable directly to the inverter and to the mains filter and connect it to the
mounting plate with as large a surface as possible.
Use of a brake chopper:
- Connect the screen of the brake resistor cable directly to the mounting plate, at the brake chopper and the brake
resistor with as large a surface as possible.
- Connect the screen of the cable between controller and brake chopper directly to the mounting plate, at the
inverter and the brake chopper with a surface as large as possible.
Screen the control cables:
- Connect both screen ends of the digital control cables.
- Connect one screen end of the analog control cables.
- Always connect the screens to the screen connection at the controller over the shortest possible distance.
Use of the controllers in residential areas:
- To limit the radio interference, use an additional screen damping 10 dB. This is usually achieved by installation
in enclosed and grounded control cabinets made of metal.
Ground all metallically conductive components (controller, mains filter, motor filter, mains choke) using suitable
cables connected to a central point (PE bar).
Maintain the minimum cross-sections prescribed in the safety regulations:
- For EMC, not the cable cross-section is important, but the surface and the contact with a cross-section as large
as possible, i.e. large surface.
Installation
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 ... F3
K1
OFF
Z1
K1
PES
L1
L2
ON
F4 F5
PE
L3
PES
PES
PES
+UG
-UG +UG
-UG
932X - 933X
PE
T1
T2
K1
RB
9351
U
PES
PE
X7
7 62 63
PES
PES
Z2
28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 59
PES
PES
-X1
K1
+
PES
PE
RFR
PE
R
3~
FIG 4-16
F1...F5
K1
Z1
Z2
-X1
PES
K35.0124
Example for an installation in accordance with the EMC regulations

Fuses (see chapter 3.3.4 and chapter 4.2.7.1)
Mains contactor
Mains filter A or B see accessories
Brake module, see accessories
Terminal strip in control cabinet
HF screen termination by large-surface PE connection
(see Screening in this chapter)
9300BA0998
4-35
Installation
4-36
9300BA0998
Commissioning
5
5.1
Commissioning
Initial switch-on
Stop!
Prior to initial switch-on of the controller, check the wiring for completeness,
short-circuit, and earth fault:
- Power connection:
- Supply via terminals L1, L2 and L3 (direct mains connection) or alternatively
via terminals +UG, -UG (DC bus connection, network of drives)
- Motor connection:
- In-phase connection to the motor (direction of rotation)
- Feedback system (resolver, incremental encoder, )
- Control terminals:
- Controller enable: terminal X5/28 (reference potential: X5/39)
- Direction of rotation terminal X5/E1 or X5/E2
(reference potential: X5/39)
- with external setpoint selection: terminals X6/1, X6/2
(reference potential: X6/7)
- Cover of the power terminals:
- Put on cover(s) and fix.
- Keep to the switch-on sequence!
Tip!
- All specifications of the parameterization refer to the application example
Speed control in chapter 11.2.1.
- Use the convenient short set-up menus for the commissioning with the
operating module 9371 BB or the PC and the Global Drive Control or
LEMOC2 in which the codes for the most important settings are summarized
(see also chapter 7.1.2).
9300BA0998
5-1
Commissioning
5.1.1
Switch-on sequence
1. X5/28 (controller enable) must be open (LOW).
2. X5/E4 to HIGH signal (+13 V ... +30 V)
3. Switch on mains:
- The controller is ready for operation after approx.0.5 s
(2 s for drives with sine-cosine encoder with serial interface).
4. Adapt controller to the operating conditions under C0173:
- If the controllers are not adapted, their lives are reduced.
C0173 =
0
1 (factory setting)
2
3
4
Mains voltage
< 400 V
400 V
upper switch-off threshold Operation
400 V < UMains { 460

V
480 V
480 V
770 V
800 V
with
ith or without
ith t brake
b k unitit
without brake unit

with brake unit
5. Enter motor data:

- For drives with Lenze motor: select motor under C0086.
- For drives with other motors: see chapter 5.2.
6. Select feedback system:
- Drives with resolver: no changes required.
- Drives with other feedback systems:
Select feedback system under C0025.
Set encoders voltage under C0421.
(Menu: Motor / Feedb., submenu: Feedback or
menu: Motor/Feedback system, submenu: Feedback systems)
- For sensorless speed control (SSC): C0025 = 1. Do not use this control for
new applications (see chapter 4.2.10).
7. When the digital terminals X5 are supplied with internal voltage:
- Assign output X5/A1 with FIXED1. Terminal X5/A1 supplies approx. 24 V
(see also chapter 4.2.8.2 and 5.7.2)
Tip!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined configurations in C0005.
C0005 = XX1X (e.g. 1010 = speed control via terminals) automatically assigns the
output X5/A1 to FIXED1.
8. Set the maximum speed under C0011.

9. Enter a direction of rotation (see chapter 5.4):
- CW rotation: HIGH signal at X5/E1 (+13 V +30 V)
- CCW rotation: HIGH signal at X5/E2 (+13 V +30 V)
5-2
9300BA0998
Commissioning
10. Apply setpoint:

- Apply a voltage > 0 V (max. 10 V) at X6/1, X6/2.
- Do not activate a JOG setpoint (X5/E3 LOW).
11. Check whether the drive is ready for operation:
- When the green LED is flashing:
Controller is ready for operation, go on with 12.
- When green LED is dark and red LED is flashing:
Interference occurred. Before proceeding with the commissioning, elininate
the fault (see chapter 9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination).
12. Enable controller (see chapter 5.3):
- The green LED is illuminated if a HIGH signal is applied at X5/28 (+13 V
+30 V) and no other source of controller inhibit is active.
13. For operation with a fieldbus module, additional settings are necessary
(see operating instructions of the corresponding fieldbus module).
The motor will now rotate with the setpoint speed and the selected direction of
rotation.
Troubleshooting:
Feedback system
Asynchronous
motor
Synchronous
motor
Fault
- Motor rotates CCW when viewed to the
motor shaft
- C0060 counts down after controller enable
Motor
- Rotates with Imax and half slip frequency
- Does not react on setpoint changes
- Motor does not follow the setpoint change
- Imax follows the setpoint in idle running
- Motor rotates CCW when viewed to the
motor shaft.
Cause / remedy
Feedback system is not connected in-phase
- Connect feedback system in-phase
Motor is not connected in-phase

- Connect motor in-phase
in hase at the terminals U,
V, W
The rotor angle (offset of electrical and
mechanical rotor angle) is not correct
- Make a rotor position adjustment (C0095 =
1). For this, operate the motor without load.
9300BA0998
5-3
Commissioning
5.2
Input of the motor data

To achieve an optimum speed-torque behaviour of the drive, it is necessary to enter
the nameplate data of the connected motor.
- If a LENZE motor is used:
- Select the motor type under C0086 (see code table).The controller sets all
other motor data automatically.
- To achieve outstanding accuracy you can enter the eight-digit designation
of the motor nameplate Geber (encoder) under C0416 when using
motors with resolvers (optional).
Tip!
Obtain the motor type from the nameplate. Example: 161
The motor designation behind this number is shown in the display
(DSKS56-33-200).
- If the motor type is not listed under C0086, select a Lenze motor with similar
data under C0086 (see table). You have to change the following motor data
manually:
- C0006: Operating mode of the motor control
- C0022: Adapt Imax to the maximum motor current
- C0081: Rated motor power
- C0087: Rated motor speed
- C0088: Rated motor current
- C0089: Rated motor frequency
- C0090: Rated motor voltage
- C0091: Motor-cos j
Only for very high requirements to the control features:
- C0084: Stator resistance of the motor
- C0085: Leakage inductance of the motor
5-4
9300BA0998
Commissioning
Tip!
- All required inputs are contained in the menu motor/feedb.
(motor/feedback system).
- If you select a motor type under C0086 and change one of the above listed
motor data subsequently, C0086 = o (COMMON) is set (i.e. no Lenze motor
is used).
- Do not operate reluctance motors.
Lenze motor
type
C0086
No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
40
41
42
43
Display
DSKA56-140
DFKA71-120
DSKA71-140
DFKA80-60
DSKA80-70
DFKA80-120
DSKA80-140
DFKA90-60
DSKA90-80
DFKA90-120
DSKA90-140
DFKA100-60
DSKA100-80
DFKA100-120
DSKA100-140
DFKA112-60
DSKA112-85
DFKA112-120
DSKA112-140
DFQA100-50
DFQA100-100
DFQA112-28
DFQA112-58
DFQA132-20
DFQA132-42
DFQA112-50
DFQA112-100
DFQA132-36
DFQA132-76
MDSKAXX056-22
MDFKAXX071-22
MDSKAXX071-22
MDFKAXX080-22
MDSKAXX080-22
MDFKAXX080-22
MDSKAXX080-22
MDFKAXX090-22
MDSKAXX090-22
MDFKAXX090-22
MDSKAXX090-22
MDFKAXX100-22
MDSKAXX100-22
MDFKAXX100-22
MDSKAXX100-22
MDFKAXX112-22
MDSKAXX112-22
MDFKAXX112-22
MDSKAXX112-22
MDFQAXX100-22
MDFQAXX100-22
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX132-32
MDFQAXX132-32
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX132-32
MDFQAXX132-32
C0081
C0087
PN [kW] n N [rpm]
0.80
3950
2.20
3410
1.70
4050
2.10
1635
1.40
2000
3.90
3455
2.30
4100
3.80
1680
2.60
2300
6.90
3480
4.10
4110
6.40
1700
4.00
2340
13.20
3510
5.20
4150
11.00
1710
6.40
2490
20.30
3520
7.40
4160
10.60
1420
20.30
2930
11.50
760
22.70
1670
17.00
550
40.30
1200
20.10
1425
38.40
2935
36.40
1030
60.10
2235
C0088
C0089
C0090
IN [A]
2.4
6.0
4.4
4.8
3.3
9.1
5.8
8.5
5.5
15.8
10.2
13.9
8.2
28.7
14.0
22.5
13.5
42.5
19.8
26.5
46.9
27.2
49.1
45.2
88.8
43.7
81.9
77.4
144.8
f N [Hz]
140
120
140
60
70
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
85
120
140
50
100
28
58
20
42
50
100
39
76
U N [V]
Motor type
Thermal
sensor
Asynchronous servo
motor
KTY
390
350
390
330
390
320
360
340
9300BA0998
5-5
Commissioning
Lenze motor
type
C0086
No.
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
5-6
Display
DSVA56-140
DFVA71-120
DSVA71-140
DFVA80-60
DSVA80-70
DFVA80-120
DSVA80-140
DFVA90-60
DSVA90-80
DFVA90-120
DSVA90-140
DFVA100-60
DSVA100-80
DFVA100-120
DSVA100-140
DFVA112-60
DSVA112-85
DFVA112-120
DSVA112-140
DSKS36-13-200
DSKS36-23-200
DSKS56-23-150
DSKS56-33-150
DSKS71-13-150
DFKS71-13-150
DSKS71-23-150
DFKS71-23-150
DSKS71-33-150
DFKS71-33-150
DSKS56-23-190
DSKS56-33-200
DSKS71-03-170
DFKS71-03-165
DSKS71-13-185
DFKS71-13-180
DSKS71-33-180
DFKS71-33-175
9300BA0998
DSVAXX056-22
DFVAXX071-22
DSVAXX071-22
DFVAXX080-22
DSVAXX080-22
DFVAXX080-22
DSVAXX080-22
DFVAXX090-22
DSVAXX090-22
DFVAXX090-22
DSVAXX090-22
DFVAXX100-22
DSVAXX100-22
DFVAXX100-22
DSVAXX100-22
DFVAXX112-22
DSVAXX112-22
DFVAXX112-22
DSVAXX112-22
MDSKSXX036-13
MDSKSXX036-23
MDSKSXX056-23
MDSKSXX056-33
MDSKSXX071-13
MDFKSXX071-13
MDSKSXX071-23
MDFKSXX071-23
MDSKSXX071-33
MDFKSXX071-33
MDSKSXX056-23
MDSKSXX056-33
MDSKSXX071-03
MDFKSXX071-03
MDSKSXX071-13
MDFKSXX071-13
MDSKSXX071-33
MDFKSXX071-33
C0081
C0087
PN [kW] n N [rpm]
0.80
3950
2.20
3410
1.70
4050
2.10
1635
1.40
2000
3.90
3455
2.30
4100
3.80
1680
2.60
2300
6.90
3480
4.10
4110
6.40
1700
4.00
2340
13.20
3510
5.20
4150
11.00
1710
6.40
2490
20.30
3520
7.40
4160
0.25
4000
0.54
4000
0.60
3000
0.91
3000
1.57
3000
2.29
3000
2.33
3000
3.14
3000
3.11
3000
4.24
3000
1.1
3800
1.8
4000
2.0
3400
2.6
3300
3.2
3700
4.1
3600
4.6
3600
5.9
3500
C0088
C0089
C0090
IN [A]
2.4
6.0
4.4
4.8
3.3
9.1
5.8
8.5
5.5
15.8
10.2
13.9
8.2
28.7
14.0
22.5
13.5
42.5
19.8
0.9
1.1
1.25
2.0
3.1
4.35
4.85
6.25
6.7
9.1
2.3
3.6
4.2
5.6
7.0
9.2
10.0
13.1
f N [Hz]
140
120
140
60
70
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
85
120
140
200
200
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
190
200
170
165
185
180
180
175
U N [V]
Motor type
Thermal
sensor
Asynchronous servo
motor
TKO
(Thermal
contact)
Synchronous
servo motor
KTY
390
350
390
330
390
320
245
345
350
340
360
385
360
375
330
345
330
325
330
330
325
325
325
325
Commissioning
Lenze motor
type
C0086
No.
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
Display
DXRA071-12-50
DXRA071-22-50
DXRA080-12-50
DXRA080-22-50
DXRA090-12-50
DXRA090-32-50
DXRA100-22-50
DXRA100-32-50
DXRA112-12-50
DXRA132-12-50
DXRA132-22-50
DXRA160-12-50
DXRA160-22-50
DXRA180-12-50
DXRA180-22-50
30kW-ASM-50
37kW-ASM-50
45kW-ASM-50
55kW-ASM-50
75kW-ASM-50
DXRA071-12-87
DXRA071-22-87
DXRA080-12-87
DXRA080-22-87
DXRA090-12-87
DXRA090-32-87
DXRA100-22-87
DXRA100-32-87
DXRA112-12-87
DXRA132-12-87
DXRA132-22-87
DXRA160-12-87
DXRA160-22-87
DXRA180-12-87
DXRA180-22-87
30kW-ASM-87
37kW-ASM-87
45kW-ASM-87
55kW-ASM-87
75kW-ASM-87
DXRAXX071-12
DXRAXX071-22
DXRAXX080-12
DXRAXX080-22
DXRAXX090-12
DXRAXX090-32
DXRAXX100-22
DXRAXX100-32
DXRAXX112-12
DXRAXX132-12
DXRAXX132-22
DXRAXX160-12
DXRAXX160-22
DXRAXX180-12
DXRAXX180-22
DXRAXX071-12
DXRAXX071-22
DXRAXX080-12
DXRAXX080-22
DXRAXX090-12
DXRAXX090-32
DXRAXX100-22
DXRAXX100-32
DXRAXX112-12
DXRAXX132-12
DXRAXX132-22
DXRAXX160-12
DXRAXX160-22
DXRAXX180-12
DXRAXX180-22
C0081
C0087
PN [kW] n N [rpm]
0.25
1410
0.37
1398
0.55
1400
0.75
1410
1.10
1420
1.50
1415
2.20
1425
3.00
1415
4.00
1435
5.50
1450
7.50
1450
11.00
1460
15.00
1460
18.50
1470
22.00
1456
30.00
1470
37.00
1470
45.00
1480
55.00
1480
75.00
1480
0.43
2525
0.64
2515
0.95
2515
1.3
2525
1.95
2535
2.7
2530
3.9
2535
5.35
2530
7.10
2545
9.7
2555
13.2
2555
19.3
2565
26.4
2565
32.4
2575
38.7
2560
52.00
2546
64.00
2546
78.00
2563
95.00
2563
130.00
2563
Motor type
Thermal
sensor
400
Asynchroy
nous iinverter
t
motor
(in star connection)
TKO
(Thermal
contact)
400
Asynchroy
nous iinverter
t
motor
(in delta connection)
TKO
(Thermal
contact)
C0088
C0089
C0090
IN [A]
0.9
1.2
1.7
2.3
2.7
3.6
4.8
6.6
8.3
11.0
14.6
21.0
27.8
32.8
38.8
52.0
66.0
82.0
93.0
132.0
1.5
2.0
2.9
4.0
4.7
6.2
8.3
11.4
14.3
19.1
25.4
36.5
48.4
57.8
67.4
90.0
114.0
142.0
161.0
228.0
f N [Hz]
U N [V]
50
87
9300BA0998
5-7
Commissioning
5.3
Controller enable
- The controller is enabled only after all sources of controller inhibit have been
reset (series connection of all sources).
- When the controller is enabled, the green LED on the controller is
illuminated.
- The active sources of the controller inhibit are displayed under C0183 (see
also menu: Diagnostic; Actual info.
The following table shows the conditions for the controller enable:
Source controller inhibit
Controller inhibited
Controller enabled
Note
Terminal X5/28
0 V +4 V
+ 13 V + 30 V
Operating unit
STOP key
RUN key
Inhibit with the STOP key is

possible only if the STOP key is
assigned with CINH under
C0469.
Fault
In case of TRIP
In case of Message
TRIP reset
For check see chapter 9
System bus
Transmission of the control

information INHIBIT via C0135
Transmission of the control

information ENABLE via C0135
See systems manual
Field bus module
See Operating Instructions of the corresponding fieldbus module
Tip!
All sources act like a series connection of switches which are independent of each
other.
5.4
Input of the direction of rotation

Based on the factory setting, the motor direction of rotation depends on
- the sign of the speed setpoint (link of main and additional setpoint).
- the triggering of the digital inputs X5/E1 and X5/E2.
5-8
9300BA0998
Commissioning
5.5
Quick stop
Using the quick stop function (QSP), you can stop the drive for a time to be set,
independently of the setpoint input.
In the factory setting, the quick stop function is active:
- If, during mains connection
- X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = HIGH or
- X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = LOW
- If, during operation
- X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = LOW
QSP is recognized by the controller if a LOW signal is applied at X5/E1 and
X5/E1 for more than approx. 2 ms.
Function:
- The speed decelerates to zero according to the set deceleration time under
C0105 (factory setting = 0 s). The drive stop driftfree.
- The drive accelerates to its setpoint along the set ramps if one of the inputs is
triggered with a HIGH level.
- If the speed was not zero, the controller synchronizes to the actual speed.
5.6
Change of the internal control structure

The internal control structure is adapted to the application (e.g. speed control,
torque control, phase control, ) via code C0005 (see chapter 11.3). For this, the
controller must first be inhibited.
Stop!
When the internal control structure is changed, another terminal assignment may
result.
9300BA0998
5-9
Commissioning
5.7
Changing of the terminal assignment

(see also chapter 8.3 Working with function blocks)
If you change the configuration under C0005, the assignment of all inputs and
outputs with their corresponding default assignment is overwritten.If necessary,
you have to adapt the function assignment to your wiring.
Tip!
Use the menu Terminal I/O when the 9371BB operating module is used or the
menu Terminal I/O with Global Drive Control or LEMOC2.
Stop!
If you reassign an input, the previously assigned signal source is not overwritten!
Remove unwanted active links (see chapter 8.3.3).
5.7.1
Freely assignable digital inputs

Five freely assignable digital inputs are available (X5/E1 X5/E5). You can
determine a polarity for each input and thus define whether the input is HIGH active
or LOW active.
Change assignment:
Tip!
Use the subment DIGIN with the 9371BB operating module or the submenu
Digital inputs with Global Drive Control or LEMOC2.
5-10
9300BA0998
Commissioning
Example:
Menu Terminal I/O; DIGIN (Terminals I/O;digital inputs)
The most important targets for digital inputs are listed below
Valid for the base configuration C0005 = 1000.
Code
CFG
C0885
Subcode Signal name

000
R/L/Q-R
triggered by
Signal (interface)
DIGIN1
(Terminal
X5/E1)
DIGIN2
(Terminal
X5/E2)
Note
Selection list 2
0051
HIGH = Main setpoint not inverted (CW
rotation)
0052
HIGH = Main setpoint inverted (CCW
rotation)
HIGH = Fixed speed of C0039/x has
0053
priorityy over main setpoint
Th signals
The
i l are bi
binary coded.
d d
1000
C0886
000
R/L/Q-L
C0787
001
NSET-JOG*1
DIGIN3
002
003
004
001
002
003
004
001
NSET-JOG*2
NSET-JOG*4
NSET-JOG*8
NSET-TI*1
NSET-TI*2
NSET-TI*4
NSET-TI*8
DCTRL-PAR*1
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
(Terminal
X5/E3)
-
002
DCTRL-PAR*2
FIXED0
1000
C0881
000
DCTRL-PAR-LOAD
FIXED0
1000
LOW-HIGH edge loads the parameter

set selected with DCTRL-PAR*x
C0871
000
DCTRL-TRIP-SET
DIGIN4
(Terminal
X5/E4)
0054
LOW = controller sets TRIP (EEr)
C0876
DCTRL-TRIP-RES
DIGIN5
(Terminal
X5/E5)
0055
LOW-HIGH edge = resets active trip
C0920
C0921
000
000
REF-ON
REF-MARK
FIXED0
FIXED0
1000
1000
HIGH = start homing

LOW-HIGH edge = stop homing
C0788
C0880
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Additional acceleration and deceleration

times
i
off C0101/x
C0101/ andd C0103/x
C0103/
The signals are binary coded.
coded
Parameter set selection:
The signals are binary coded (see
chapter 7.2.4)
1. Select the input of the function block for which you want to assign
another source, via the configuration code CFG in the code level.
- Example:
C0787/2 (CFG/subcode) determines the source for the input
NSET-JOG*2 (signal name) in the function block Speed setpoint
conditioning (NSET).
2. Change to the parameter level using PRG. Select the source (signal) from
the displayed list. Determine the origin of the signal for the control of this
input.
- Example:
NSET-JOG*2 is to be controlled by terminal X5/E5 (interface).
- Select DIGIN5 (signal) and confirm with SHIFT + PRG.
3. Change to the code level by pressing PRG twice.
9300BA0998
5-11
Commissioning
4. Determine the polarity or the input terminals X5/E1 to X5/E5 (HIGH active
or LOW active) under C0114 and subcode.
- Select the terminal in the code level via subcode.
- Change to the parameter level using PRG and select the polarity.
- Change to the code level by pressing PRG twice.
5. Repeat step 1 to 4 until all desired inputs are assigned.
6. Remove unwanted connections (see chapter 8.3.3). The previous
connection of terminal X5/5 is not removed automatically. If you want to
remove the connection:
- Select C0876 in the code level (previous target of terminal X5/E5)
- Change to the parameter level using PRG.
- Select FIXED0 (signal) and confirm with SHIFT+PRG.
5.7.2
Freely assignable digital outputs

Four freely assignable digital outputs are available (X5/A1 X5/A4). You can
determine a polarity for each input and thus define whether the input is HIGH active
or LOW active.
The most important codes are listed in the submenu: DIGOUT (digital outputs)
Change assignment:
1. Select the output which is to be assigned to another function under
C0117 via the subcode.
2. Change to the parameter level using PRG.Select the signal which is to be
output by the selected output terminal, from the displayed list. Change to
the code level using PRG.
3. Determine the polarity (HIGH active or LOW active) under C0118 via the
subcode of the output.
4. Repeat step 1 to 3 until all desired outputs are assigned.
5-12
9300BA0998
Commissioning
5.7.3
Freely assignable analog inputs

The most important codes are listed in the submenu: AIN1 X6.1/2 or AIN2 X6.3/4
(analog input 1 (X6.1/2) or analog input 2 (X6.3/4))
Change assignment:
1. Select the input of the function block to which you want to assign another
source, in the code level.
- Example
Determine the source for the input main setpoint (NSET-N) in the function
block speed setpoint conditioning (NSET) under C0780.
sued as a source for the selected input, from the displayed list.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 until all desired inputs are assigned.
4. Remove unwanted links (see chapter 8.3.3).
5.7.4
Freely assignable monitor outputs

You can output internal signals as voltage signals via the monitor outputs X6/62 and
X6/63.
You can adapt the outputs to a measuring instrument or a slave under C0108 and
C0109.
The most important codes are listed in the submenu: AOUT1 X6.62 or AIN2 X6.63
(analog output 1 (X6.62) or analog output 1 (X6.63))
Change assignment:
1. Select the output to which you want to assign another signal (source) in
the code level (e.g. C0431 for output X6/62).
output by the monitor output, from the displayed list.
3. Adjust an offset in the connected hardware under C0109, if necessary.
4. Adapt the signal gain of the connected hardware under C0108, if
necessary.
5. Repeat step 1 to 4 to assign the second output.
9300BA0998
5-13
Commissioning
5-14
9300BA0998
During operation
During operation
6.1
Status indications of the operating module

Display
RDY
IMP
FAIL
IMAX
M MAX
6.2
on
Ready for operation
Power outputs inhibited
Active fault
(TRIP, Message or Warning)
Motor current setpoint C0022
Speed controller within its limitation.
Drive is torque controlled.
off
Initializing or fault
Power outputs enabled
No fault
Drive is speed-controlled
Information on operation
When operating the controller, please observe the following notes:
Stop!
- Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply at L1, L2, L3 or
+UG, -UG can overload the internal input current load:
- Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and reconnection.
- During mains switching (L1,L2,L3) it is not important whether further

controllers are supplied via the DC bus.
6.2.1
Switching on the motor side

- Switching on the motor side of the inverter is permissible for emergency
switch-off.
- Please note:
- Switching while a controller is enabled may cause the fault indication 0Cx
(short-circuit/earth fault in operating case x).
- For long motor cables and operation of controllers with smaller output
power, leakage currents through interfering cable capacitances may cause
the fault indication OCx.
- When switching on the motor side, the systems must be rated for DC
voltages.U DCmax = 800 V.
9300BA0998
6-1
During operation
6.2.2
Controller protection by current derating

Valid for the types 9326 to 9332.
For field frequencies < 5 Hz the controller automatically limits the maximum
permissible output current.
- For operation with chopping frequency = 8 kHz (C0018=1, optimum power):
- The current is derated depending on the heatsink temperature (see
FIG 6-1).
- For operation with chopping frequency = 16 kHz (C0018=2, optimum noise):
- The current is always derated to Ir16 = I016 .
- For operation with automatic change-over of the chopping frequency
(C0018=0):
- Below the threshold, the controller operates with 16 kHz (optimum noise).
The function of the current derating follow the characteristic Imax 16 kHz
in FIG 6-1.
- If a higher torque is required from the machine for example for acceleration,
the controller automatically switches to 8 kHz (optimum power).The
function of the current derating follows the characteristic Imax 8 kHz in
FIG 6-1.
IM
o to r
I0
X
1 .5 * I0
I0
4 0
C
6 0
1 .2 5 * I0
I0
K <
C
0
8
>
IN
1 6
9300BA0998
1 6
= Im
= Im
a x
a x
a t 8 k H z
a t 1 6 k H z
1 6
= c h a n g e o v e r to 8 k H z
a t C 0 0 1 8 = 0
|fd| [H z ]
Current derating function of the types 9326 to 9332

JK Heatsink temperature
Irx: Rated current at U, V, W depending on the chopping frequency
f d : Field frequency at the output U, V, W
I0x : max. standstill current for field frequency = 0 Hz
See also the ratings in chapter 3.3.
6-2
1 .5 * IN
0
FIG 6-1
1 .5 * IN
Parameterization
Parameterization
- The parameter setting of the controller is used to adapt the drive to your
applications.
- The complete parameter set is organized in codes which are consecutively
numbered and always begin with C
(see code table, chapter 11.3).
- You can save the parameter set of an application.
- Four parameter sets are available so that the controller can be adjusted
rapidly from one application to another.
- When delivered, the parameter sets are factory-set.
7.1
Ways of parameterization
There are two ways to change parameters:
- Using the operating module
- Using a superimposed host (PC or PLC) via fieldbus modules and operating
programs (see accessories chapter 11.1).
In these operating instructions, only the change of parameters using the operating
module is described.
9300BA0998
7-1
Parameterization
7.1.1
Structure of the parameter set

To simplify operation, the operating module 9371BB and the PC programs
GLOBAL DRIVE CONTROL and LEMOC2 consist of menu levels which will guide
you rapidly to the desired codes:
- Main menu
- contains submenus
- contains the complete code list
- Submenus
- contain the codes which are assigned to them
Codes consist of:
- Code level
- Codes without subcodes contain one parameter
- Codes with subcodes contain several parameters
- Parameter level/operating level
There are four different parameter types:
- Absolute values of a physical variable
(e. g. 400 V, 10 s)
- Relative values of controller variables
(e. g. 50 % setpoint)
- Codes for specific states
(e. g. 0 = controller inhibited, 1 = controller enabled)
- Display values
These values can only be displayed and not changed.
(e. g. actual motor current under C0054)
You can change absolute and relative values in discrete steps.
7-2
9300BA0998
Parameterization
7.1.2
List of the selection menus
Operating module 9371 BB
Global Drive Control or LEMOC2
Main menu
Main menu
Submenu
Submenu
USER menu
USER menu
Code list
Code list
Load / Store
Parameter set management
Diagnostic
Diagnostics
Actual info
History
Short setup
Momentary operation
History
Short setup
Speed mode
Torque mode
DF master
DF slave bus
Speed mode
Torque mode
Digital frequency master
Digital frequency slave
bus
Digital frequency slave
cascade
Configuration User Menu
DF slave cas
UserMenue CFG
Main FB
Main function blocks

NSET
NSET-JOG
NSET-RAMP1
MCTRL
DFSET
DCTRL
Terminal I/O
NSET:
NSET-JOG:
NSET-RAMP1:
MCTRL:
DFSET:
DCTRL:
Terminal I/O
AIN1 X6.1/2
AIN2 X6.3/4
AOUT1 X6 62
AOUT2 X6 63
DIGIN
DIGOUT
DFIN
DFOUT
State bus
Controller
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog output 1
Analog output 2
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Statebus
X6.1/2
X6.3/4
X6/62
X6/63
Controller setting
Speed
Current
Phase
Motor/Feedb.
speed
Current/Torque
Phase
Motor/Feedback system
Motor adj
Feedback
Monitoring
Speed preparation
JOG values
Standard ramp generator
Motor control
Digital frequency processing
Device control
Motor adjustment
Feedback systems
Monitoring
9300BA0998
7-3
Parameterization
Main menu
Main menu
Submenu
LECOM/AIF
LECOM/AIF interface
LECOM-A/B
AIF interface
Status word
System bus
LECOM-A/B
AIF data interface
Status word
System bus
Management
CAN-IN1
CAN-OUT1
CAN-IN2
CAN-OUT2
CAN-IN3
CAN-OUT3
Status word
FDO
Diagnostic
FB config
Func. blocks
9300BA0998
CAN management
CAN-IN1
CAN-OUT1
CAN-IN2
CAN-OUT2
CAN-IN3
CAN-OUT3
Status word
FDO:
Diagnostics
Input block 1
Output block 1
Input block 2
Output block 2
Input block 3
Output block 3
Free digital outputs
FB configuration
Function blocks
ABS
ADD
AIF-OUT
AIN1
AIN2
AND1
AND2
AND3
AND4
AND5
AND6
AND7
ANEG1
ANEG2
AOUT1
AOUT2
ARIT1
ARIT2
ARITPH1
ASW1
ASW2
ASW3
ASW4
BRK
CAN-OUT1
CAN-OUT2
CAN-OUT3
CONV2
7-4
Submenu
ABS:
ADD
AIF-OUT
AIN1
AIN2
AND1
AND2
AND3
AND4
AND5
AND6
AND6
ANEG1
ANEG2
AOUT1
AOUT2
ARIT1
ARIT2
ARITPH1
ASW1
ASW2
ASW3
ASW4
BRK
CAN-OUT1
CAN-OUT2
CAN-OUT3
CONV2
Absolute value
Addition
Data interface
Analog input1 (term. 1/2
Analog input2 (term. 3/4
Logic AND
Logic AND
Logic AND
Logic AND
Logic AND
Logic AND
Logic AND
Analog NOT
Analog NOT
Analog output term. 62
Analog output term. 63
Arithmetics
Arithmetics
32 Bit Arithmetics
Analog switch
Analog switch
Analog switch
Analog switch
Brake logic
Output block 1
Output block 2
Output block 3
Converter
Parameterization

Main menu
Submenu
Main menu
Submenu
CFG-FB
CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
CONV1
CONV3
CONV4
CONV5
CONV6
CONVPHA1
CONVPHPH1
CONVPP1
DB
DCTRL
DFIN
DFOUT
DFRFG
CFG
CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
CONV1
CONV3
CONV4
CONV5
CONV6
CONVPHA1
CONVPHPH1
CONVPP1
DB
DCTRL
DFIN
DFOUT
DFRFG
DFSET
DIGDEL1
DIGDEL2
DIGIN
DIGOUT
DT1
FCNT1
FDO
FEVAN1
FEVAN2
FIXSET
FLIP1
FLIP2
LIM
GEARCOMP
MCTRL
MFAIL
MPOT
NOT1
NOT2
NOT3
NOT4
NOT5
NSET
NSET-JOG
NSET-RAMP1
OR1
OR2
OR3
OR4
OR5
DFSET
DIGDEL1
DIGDEL2
DIGIN
DIGOUT
DT1
FCNT1
FDO
FEVAN1
FEVAN2
FIXSET
FLIP1
FLIP2
LIM
GEARCOMP
MCTRL
MFAIL
MPOT
NOT1
NOT2
NOT3
NOT4
NOT5
NSET
NSET-JOG
NSET-RAMP1
OR1
OR2
OR3
OR4
OR5
FB configuration
Analog comparator
Analog comparator
Analog comparator
Converter
Converter
Converter
Converter
Converter
32-bit converter
32-bit converter
32-bit / 16-bit converter
Analog dead band
Device control
Digital frequency ramp
generator
Digital delay
Digital delay
Digital input E1 - E5
Digital output A1 - A4
Differential element
Counter
Free digital outputs
Free analog input variable
Fixed setpoints
Flip-Flop
Flip-Flop
Limiter
Gearbox torsion
Motor control
Mains failure detection
Motor potentiometer
Logic NOT
Logic NOT
Logic NOT
Logic NOT
Logic NOT
Speed preparation
JOG values
Standard ramp generator
Logic OR
Logic OR
Logic OR
Logic OR
Logic OR
9300BA0998
7-5
Parameterization

Main menu
Submenu
Main menu
PCTRL
PHADD1
PHCMP1
PHCMP2
PHCMP3
PHDIFF1
PHDIV1
PHINT1
PHINT2
PHINT3
PT1
R/L/Q
REF
RFG
SRFG1
STORE1
STORE2
SYNC1
PHDIV1
PHINT1
PHINT2
PHINT3
PT1
R/L/Q
REF
RFG
SRFG1
STORE1
STORE2
SYNC1
TRANS1
TRANS2
TRANS3
TRANS4
TRANS1
TRANS2
TRANS3
TRANS4
FCODE
Free codes
Identify
Identification
Drive
Op Keypad
7-6
9300BA0998
Submenu
PCTRL
PHADD1
PHCMP1
PHCMP2
PHCMP3
PHDIFF1
Controller
LECOM
Process controller
32-bit adding element
Phase comparator
Phase comparator
Phase comparator
32-bit comparison between
setpoint and actual value
Phase division
Phase integrator
Phase integrator
Phase integrator
Delay element
CW-CCW-QSP
Homing
Ramp generator
S-shaped ramp generator
Saving phase, E5
Saving phase, E4
Control program
synchronization
Signal evaluation
Signal evaluation
Signal evaluation
Signal evaluation
Parameterization
7.2
Parameterization using the operating module
7.2.1
The operating module

(Order no.: EMZ9371BB)
The operating module can also be plugged on the X1 interface and removed during
operation.
When the operating module is plugged on the controller, the module is initialized.
The operating module is ready to operate after GLOBAL DRIVEREADY has been
displayed.
Front view
Global DRIVE
RDY
IMP
Imax
SH PRG
Para
Mmax
Fail
0051 00
1250 rpm
MCTRL-NACT
FIG 7-1
The operating module
LCD display
Status indications
RDY
Way of parameter
acceptance
SH PRG
active level;
here: parameter level
IMP
Imax
Fail
Code number
0051
1250 rpm
Para
MCTRL-NACT
FIG 7-2
Mmax
00
Subcode number
Parameter
Cursor
Text
LCD display of the operating module
9300BA0998
7-7
Parameterization
Segments and status messages of the LCD display

Segment
Code number
Subcode number
Parameter
Text
Explanation
four-digit code number
two-digit subcode number
Parameter value with max. twelve digits
Help text with max. 13 digits;
in the operating level: status information of C0183 or contents of C0004
SH PRG
SH PRG
: Parameter is accepted only with SHIFT + PRG (OFFLINE)
SH PRG: Parameter is accepted only with SHIFT + PRG during controller inhibit (OFFLINE)
: Parameter is immdiately accepted by the controller (ONLINE)
leer: Parameter cannot be changed
Menu = Menu level, Code = Code level, Para = Parameter level, no display = operating level
active level

Display
RDY
IMP
FAIL
IMAX
M MAX
on
Ready for operation
Power outputs inhibited
Active fault
Speed controller 1 in its limitation
Drive is torque controlled.
off
Initializing or fault
Power outputs enabled
No fault
Drive is speed-controlled
Key functions
SHIFT + means:
1. Press the SHIFT key with one finger and keep it pressed.
2. Press the second indicated key with another finger.
Keys
y
Function
PRG
SHIFT + PRG
Menu level
-
Code level
Parameter level/ operating level
Change between code, parameter and operating level
Accept parameters (depending on
the parameter and menu)
next higher menu item

next higher menu item fast
next lower menu item
next lower menu item fast
next higher menu level
next lower menu level (submenus) or
code level
next higher code number

increase code number fast
next lower code number
decrease code number fast
go to the menu level
-
?
SHIFT +
SHIFT +
*

RUN
STOP
7-8
9300BA0998
increase displayed number

increase displayed number fast
decrease displayed number
decrease displayed number fast
Cursor to the left
Cursor to the right
cancel function of the STOP key

Inhibit controller:
Quick stop, controller inhibit or switched off C0469
Trip reset:
when a trip has occurred and the STOP key is pressed (independently of C0469).
Then, press RUN.
The LED in the key shows the status of the STOP key:
- LED on: STOP key pressed
- LED off: RUN key pressed
Parameterization
Operating level
From the parameter level, you reach the operating level by pressing PRG.
- In the operating level, additional status information or the additional display
value specified under C0004 is displayed (presetting: actual speed C0051).
- When selecting the USER menu, the first code level of the USER menu is
displayed in the first line.
- Additional information is displayed according to the following priority list:
Priority
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
Display
GLOBAL DRIVE INIT
XXX - TRIP
XXX - MESSAGE
Special controller states:
Meaning
Initializing or communication error between operating module and controller
active TRIP (contents of C0168/1)
active message (contents of C0168/1)
Switch-on inhibit
Source for controller inhibit (the value of C0004 is displayed at the same time):
STP1
Terminal X5/28
STP3
Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
STP4
InterBus-S or Profibus
STP5
System bus (CAN)
STP6
C0040
Source of quick stop:
QSP-term-Ext
HIGH signal is applied at input MCTRL-QSP on the function block MCTRL
(in factory setting applied to terminals X5/E1 and X5/E2)
QSP-C0135
Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
QSP-AIF
QSP-CAN
System bus (CAN)
XXX - WARNING
Active warning (contents of C0168/1)
xxxx
Value under C0004
User menu
In some applications, specific codes must be changed often.
You can therefore establish a menu menu with max. 32 codes which you use
frequently under C0517.
- The number before the comma is the code number.
- The number after the comma is the subcode.
- Code-subcode combinations are allowed only once.
9300BA0998
7-9
Parameterization
7.2.2
Change parameters
Tip!
You have to save the changed parameter set if you do not want to loose the
modifications after mains disconnection (see chapter 7.2.3).
Basic procedure
1. Change from the menus to the code level using the arrow keys?,+,* or
.Code is displayed.
2. Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or + select code
or subcode.
3. Change to the parameter level using PRG.Para is displayed.
4. Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using * or move the
cursor (small, black bar) under the number to be changed.
5. Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or + change
number.
6. Repeat 4. and 5. to change other numbers, if ncessary.
7. Accept parameters. The way of accepting the changed parameterr is
displayed in front of the parameter:
Display in front of the parameter Controller uses the new value
immediately, during the change
SH+ PRG
after pressing SH+ PRG. Acknowledgement: ok in the display
SH+ PRG
Press STOP to inhibit the controller.
Press SHIFT + PRG.Acknowledgement: ok in the display
Press RUN to enable the controller.
8. Press PRG twice to go to the code level. Code is displayed.
7-10
9300BA0998
Parameterization
7.2.3
Save parameter set

You have to save the modified parameters if you do not want to loose them after
mains disconnection.
- You can establish up to four parameter sets, e.g. if you process different
materials on a machine or if this is required by different operating states
(setup mode, stand-by).
- If you need only one parameter set, save the modifications permanently
under parameter set 1, since the controller automatically loads parameter set
1 after mains connection.
How to proceed
1. Change from the menus to the code level using the arrow keys.
Code is displayed.
2. Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or + select
C0003.
3. Change to the parameter level using PRG.
Para is displayed.
4. Set parameter to 1 using ? or + (also possible during operation).
Note: If the parameter set is to be saved under another number, select 2,
3, or 4 instead of 1.
5. Press SHIFT + PRG.
OK is displayed for approx. 1 s.
Now your settings are saved permanently under parameter set 1 (or 2, 3.
4).
9300BA0998
7-11
Parameterization
7.2.4
Load parameter set

(possible only when the controller is inhibited)
Warning!
- When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is reinitialized and acts as
if it was connected to the mains:
- System configurations and terminal assignments may be changed. Make
sure that your wiring and drive configuration match with the settings of the
parameter set.
- Only use terminal X5/28 as a source for controller inhibit! Otherwise the drive
may start accidently when changing to another parameter set.
Tip!
When the parameter set is loaded, the RDY message is not displayed, since the
controller cannot be operated during this time.
During mains connection

The controller automatically loads parameter set 1.
Via keypad
1. X5/28 = LOW
2. Select C0002 using ? or +.
4. Select the desired parameter set using ? or +.
OK is displayed.When OK is no longer displayed, the loading is
completed.
6. Enable controller with X5/28 = HIGH.
7-12
9300BA0998
Parameterization
For terminal control

You can change to other parameter sets via e.g. the digital inputs X5/E1 X5/E5.
After mains connection, the controller first reads parameter set 1. Then, the
terminals are evaluated and the desired parameter set is loaded. A LOW-HIGH
edge at input DCTRL-PAR-LOAD (Load parameter set) is not necessary in this
case:
- One or two ditital inputs must be assigned to Select parameter set in every
parameter set.
- Determine the source(s) for Select parameter set under C0880. The
signal names are: DCTRL-PAR*1 and DCTRL-PAR*2.
- One digital input must be assigned to Load parameter set in every
parameter set:
- Determine the source for Load parameter set under C0881.The signal
name is: DCTRL-PAR-LOAD.
- These inputs must have the same assignment in all parameter sets which
you want to use.
- The controller reads the terminals assigned with Select parameter as a
binary code. The input DCTRL-PAR*1 is the first input, the input
DCTRL-PAR*2 is the second input (e.g. E1 = first input, E2 = second input).
- The signal must be applied constantly at the terminals for at least 10 ms so
that the parameter set to be loaded is recognized correctly.
- Terminal signals for the selection of the parameter sets:
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Parameter set 3
Parameter set 4
1st input (DCTRL-PAR*1)

LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
2nd input (DCTRL-PAR*2)

LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
- A LOW-HIGH edge at the input Load parameter set DCTRL-PAR-LOAD

changes to the new parameter set.
Procedure:
1. Trigger digital inputs, which are assigned to the function Select
parameter set.
2. Inhibit controller with X5/28 = LOW.
3. Trigger LOW-HIGH edge at the input Load parameter set.
4. When the loading is completed:
- C0002 displays the number of the loaded parameter set.
- RDY is illuminated.
5. Controller is enabled with X5/28 = HIGH.
9300BA0998
7-13
Parameterization
7.2.5
Parameter set transfer

(possible only when the controller is inhibited)
Warning!
- When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is reinitialized and acts as
if it was connected to the mains:
- System configurations and terminal assignments may be changed.Make
sure that your wiring and drive configuration match with the settings of the
parameter set.
- Only use terminal X5/28 as a source for controller inhibit! Otherwise the drive
may start accidently when changing to another parameter set.
You can transfer complete parameter sets from one controller (e.g. controller 1) to
another (e.g. controller 2) using the operating module.
All parameter sets are copied from one controller to the operating unit and saved.
Procedure:
1. Plug operating module on controller 1.
2. Inhibit controller with X5/28 = LOW.
3. Save the last modifications in the corresponding parameter set under
C0003.
Code is displayed.
Para is displayed.
7. Select parameter 11.
RDY is no longer displayed. BUSY is displayed.
All parameter sets are copied to the operating module. Copying is
completed when BUSY is no longer displayed (after approx. one minute).
Stop!
Remove operating module only after BUSYis no longer displayed. Otherwise, TRIP
PRX is activated.
10. Plug operating module on controller 2.
11. Inhibit controller 2 with X5/28 = LOW.
Code is displayed.
7-14
9300BA0998
Parameterization

Para is displayed.
15. Select parameter 20 to copy and to save all parameter sets from the
operating module to controller 2.
RDY is no longer displayed. BUSY is displayed.
All parameter sets are copied to and saved in controller 2. Copying and
saving are completed when BUSY is no longer displayed.
Tip!
You can also copyindividual parameter sets from the operating module to controller
2:
- For this, use the parameters 11, 12, 14 or 14 instead of parameter 20 in step
15., to copy the parameter sets 1, 2, 3 or 4 to controller 2.
- You have to save the copied parameter sets if you do not want to loose the
modifications after mains disconnection (see chapter 7.2.3).
9300BA0998
7-15
Parameterization
7.2.6
Password protection
You can restrict the access to codes via the operating module using the password
protection in C0094.
- Reading C0094 using the operating module:
- C0094 = 0: password protection is not activated.
- C0094 = 9999: password protection is activated.
- Activate password protection:
- Enter four-digit number in C0094.
- Confirm using SH + PRG.
- Deactivate password protection:
- Enter four-digit number again.
- All other inputs are refused.
Effect
- Working with the operating module:
- The codes of the USER menu can still be read and changed.
- All other codes are no longer displayed.
- Working with the field bus:
- It is possible to extend the protection under C0096/1 (AIF) and C0096/2
(CAN) when working with a fieldbus.
Selection in C0096/X:
0
=
no protection
1
=
Read protection
2
=
Write protection
3
=
Read/write protection
7.3
Display functions
Actual value displays
You can read different actual values using the following codes:
Code
C0051
C0052
C0053
C0054
C0060
C0061
C0063
C0064
Meaning
Absolute actual speed [rpm]
Absolute motor voltage [V]
Absolute DC bus voltage [V]
Absolute motor current [A]
Rotor position [Inc/rev]
Heatsink temperature [C]
Absolute motor temperature [C]
Display only with connected KTY (PTC) via X7 or X8
Controller load [%]
Identification
- You can read the software version of the controller under C0099.
- Under C0093 you can read the controller type.
7-16
9300BA0998
Configuration
Configuration
Every application needs a certain, application-specific configuration (program).
For this, function blocks are available which can be linked individually for the
application. The function blocks are linked via codes (see chapter 8.3).
8.1
Predefined configurations
Base configurations are already predefined under code C0005 for standard
application of the controller. The signal flow charts of the most important base
configurations are shown in the appendix.
8.1.1
Working with predefined configurations

To adapt predefined configurations to your application, proceed as follows:
1. Select base configuration under C0005.
2. Select operating mode under C0006 (see chapter 8.2).
3. Configure different signal flow, if necessary:
- Remove or integrate function blocks (see chapter 8.3)
- Parameterize function blocks (see chapter 8.3.2)
- Reconfigure terminals
Tip!
If you change the signal flow of the basic configuration, e.g. by adding function
blocks, C0005 is set to 0. The message COMMON is displayed.
If you change only the assignment of the control inputs and outputs, C0005 is not
changed. Under code C0464 an identification is also displayed.
9300BA0998
8-1
Configuration
8.2
Operating modes
You determine, by the choice of operating mode,which interface you want to use
for parameter setting or control of the controller.
8.2.1
Parameterization
The parameters are set via the operating module or the field bus module which is
plugged to X1, or via the CAN bus (X4). Basically, the parameters can be changed
by both interfaces.
8.2.2
Control
The control is via terminals (X5 and X6), via the field bus module at X1 or via the
system bus (X4). Mixed modes are also possible.
Tip!
C0005 contains predefined configurations which allow a very simple change of the
operating mode (see systems manual).
8-2
9300BA0998
Configuration
Example: C0005 = 1005

This configuration corresponds to a speed control with control via system bus
(CAN).
If more inputs of the function blocks are to be controlled via an interface, proceed
as follows:
- Assign the function block inputs to be controlled to control objects
depending on the interface used (see chapter 8.3.3):
- Free control codes
in case of control via LECOM A/B/LI (RS232, RS485 or optical fibre
interface) or operating module.
- AIF objects
in case of control using InterBus S or Profibus DP.
- CAN objects
in case of control using system bus.
- Then, the inputs can be controlled using these codes or input objects, by
accessing them via the interface.
Example for a distribution of the control on terminals and RS232:

The main speed setpoint in the configuration C0005=1000 is to be controlled via
LECOM A/B/LI. All other inputs remain under terminal control.
1. Select C0780 via LECOM:
- C0780 is the configuration code for the main set-value NSET-N in the
function block Speed setpoint conditioning (NSET).
2. Assign a free control code via a selection number.
- e.g. 19515 (control code C0141)
The main speed setpoint is now controlled by C0141.
9300BA0998
8-3
Configuration
8.3
Working with function blocks

You can configure the signal flow in the controller yourself, by connecting function
blocks. The controller can thus be easily adapted to diverse applications.
8.3.1
Signal types
Every function block has a number of inputs and outputs for connection.
Corresponding to their functions, there are only certain types of signals at the
inputs and outputs:
- Quasi analog signals
- Symbol: L
- Unit: %
- Designation: a
- Value range: 16384 = 100%
- Resolution: 16 bit
- Digital signals
- Symbol: P
- Unit: binary, with HIGH or LOW level
- Designation: d
- Resolution: 1 bit
- Speed signals
-
Symbol: a
Unit: rpm
Designation: phd
Resolution: 16 bit
You can connect only the same types of signals. For example, an analog output
signal of one function block can only be connected to the analog input of another
function block. If you try to connect two different signal types, the connection is
rejected.
Tip!
A detailed description of all function blocks can be obtained from the systems
manual.
8-4
9300BA0998
Configuration
8.3.2
Elements of a function block

Parameterization code
Input name
Name of the function block

C1100
FCNT1-CLKUP
C1102/1
FCNT1
FCNT1-OUT
C1104/1
FCNT1-CLKDWN
C1102/2
Output symbol
C1104/2
Input symbol
C1101/1
FCNT1-LD-VAL
CTRL
FCNT1-EQUAL
C1103/1
C1102/3
FCNT1-LOAD
C1104/3
C1101/2
FCNT1-CMP-VAL
C1103/2
Configuration code
Function
Display code
FIG 8-1
Output name
Structure of an FB using the example of FCNT1
Name of the FB
Identifies the FB disambigeously. FBs with the same function are distinguished by
a number behind their names.
Every FB is defined by a selection number.The input of the selection number into the
processing table (see chapter 8.3.4)is always required for the calculation of the FB.
The selection numbers can be obtained from selection list 5 (see chapter 11.4).
Example:
(FCNT1, see FIG 8-1)
- FCNT1
selection number 6400 (selection list 5).
Input symbol
Designates the signal type which is allowed for this output as a signal source (see
also chapter 8.3.1).
Tip!
You cannot configure inputs which are not linked.
Name of the input

Consists of the FB name and a designation. Inputs with the same function are
distinguished by a number behind their designation.
9300BA0998
8-5
Configuration
Configuration code
Configures the input with a signal source (e.g. terminal signal, control code, output
of a FB, ). Inputs with identical codes are distinguished by the subcode.The
subcode is attached to the code (Cxxxx/1).These codes are configured by their
subcodes.
It is not possible to connect an input with several signal sources.
Display code
Displays the current input value. Inputs with identical codes aredistinguished bythe
subcode.The subcode is attached to the code (Cxxxx/1).These codes are
displayed via their subcodes.
Display codes cannot be processed.
Function
Represents the mathematical function as a block diagram (see FIG 8-1).
Parameterization code
Adaptation of the function or the behaviour to the application.The settings are
explained and shown in the text and/or the line diagram (see description of the FB
in the systems manual).
Output symbol
Designates the signal type. Connections with inputs of the same signal type are
possible (see also chapter 8.3.1).
Every output is defined by a selection number.The selection numbers are divided
into selection lists (1 to 4)according to the different signal types (see chapter 11.4).
An output is linked to an input by the selection numbers.
Example:
(FCNT1, see FIG 8-1)
- FCNT1-OUT
selection number 6400 (analog signal, selection list 1).
- FCNT1-EQUAL selection number 6400 (digital signal, selection list 2).
Tip!
You cannot configure outputs which are not linked.
Name of the output

Consists of the FB name and a designation. Outputs with the same function are
distinguished by a number behind their designation.
8-6
9300BA0998
Configuration
8.3.3
Connect function blocks

General rules
- Assign a signal source to an input.
- One input can have only one signal source.
- Inputs of different function blocks can have the same signal source.
- You can connect only the same types of signals.
Stop!
Existing connections which are not desired must be removed
reconfiguration.Otherwise, the drive cannot perform the desired function.
by
Tip!
For the visualization of existing connections, Lenze offers a network list generator
(see accessories: GDC PC program).
C0820/1
C0820/2
C0820/3
AND1
AND1-IN1
C0821/1
AND1-IN2
C0840
&
C0821/2
AND1-IN3
C0842
OR1
OR1-IN1
C0830/3
NOT1
NOT1-OUT
NOT2-IN
NOT2
NOT2-OUT
C0843
C0830/1
C0831/1
OR1-IN2
C0841
AND1-OUT
C0821/3
C0830/2
NOT1-IN
|1
OR1-OUT
DIGDEL1
C0720
C0721
C0723
DIGDEL1-IN
C0724
C0831/2
OR1-IN3
DIGDEL1-OUT
0
C0831/3
Possible connection
Connection not possible
FIG 8-2
Connection function blocks correctly
9300BA0998
8-7
Configuration
Basic procedure
1. Select the configuration code of the function block input which is to be
changed.
2. Determine the source of the input signal for the selected input (e.g. from
the output of another function block)
3. The function block input is assigned via a menu which contains only
those signal sources which are of the same type as the function block
input to be assigned.
4. Select the signal source and confirm.
5. Remove undesired connections, if any.
- For this, select the corresponding signal assignment of the input via the
configuration code (e. g. FIXED 0, FIXED 1, FIXED 0%, ...).
6. Repeat 1. to 5. until the desired configuration is set.
7. Save modified configuration in the desired parameter set.
Example
- Condition:
- Factory setting
- Task:
- Square the analog signal of X6/3, X6/4 and output to X6/62.
- Solution:
- You need the function blocks AIN2, ARIT2 and AOUT2.
AIN2
3
+
+
AIN2-OUT
C0026/2
C0602/1
C0407
ARIT2-IN2
C0409/1
C0027/2
C0408
AIN2-GAIN
C0600
ARIT2-IN1
C0601/1
AIN2-OFFSET
x
y
+ - *
/ x/(1-y)
C0601/2
200%
ARIT2
C434/1
ARIT2-OUT
C0431
C0108/1
C0433
C0109/1
C0432
AOUT1-GAIN
C0434/3
C0602/2
C0409/2
AOUT1-OFFSET
C0434/2
FIG 8-3
8-8
9300BA0998
Example of a simple configuration
AOUT1
AOUT1-IN
62
Configuration
Make connections
1. Determine signal source for ARIT2-IN1:
- Change to the code level using the arrow keys
- Select C0601/1 using ? or +.
- Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or +.
- Confirm using SH + PRG
- Change to the code level again using PRG.
2. Determine signal source for ARIT2-IN2:
- Select C0601/2 using ?.
- Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or +.
3. Parameterize ARIT2:
- Select C0600 using +.
- Select multiplication (selection number 3).
4. Determine signal source for AOUT1:
- Select C0431 using +.
- Select output ARIT2-OUT (selection number 5505).
5. Enter function block ARIT2 in the processing table:
- Select C0465 and subcode 8 using ?.
- Enter function block ARIT2 (selection number 5505).
- The sequence of the FB processing is thus determined.
9300BA0998
8-9
Configuration
Remove connections
- Since a source can have several targets, there may be further signal
connections, which may not be wanted.
- Example:
- In the default setting of the base configuration C0005 = 1000 (speed
control), ASW1-IN1 and AIN2-OUT are connected.
- This connection is not automatically removed by the settings described
above! If you do not want this connection, it must be removed.
ASW1
C0812/1
C0810/1
FIXED0%
C0810/2
ASW1-IN1
ASW1-IN2
ASW1-OUT
NSET-NADD
C0812/2
FIXED0
C0811
ASW1-SET
C0813
AIN2
3
+
+
AIN2-OUT
C0026/2
C0602/1
C0407
C0408
AIN2-GAIN
x
y +
ARIT2-IN2
C0409/1
C0027/2
C0600
ARIT2-IN1
C0601/1
AIN2-OFFSET
200%
*
x/(1-y)
C0601/2
ARIT2
C434/1
ARIT2-OUT
C0431
C0108/1
C0433
C0109/1
C0432
AOUT1-GAIN
62
C0434/3
C0602/2
C0409/2
AOUT1
AOUT1-IN
AOUT1-OFFSET
C0434/2
FIG 8-4
Remove connections in a configuration
6. Remove connection between ASW1-IN1 and AIN2-OUT:

- Select output AIN2/OUT (selection number 55) using ? or + Select
C0810/1
- Select the constant FIXED0% (selection number 1000) using ? or +.
Now, the connection is removed.
7. Save new configuration, if desired:
- If you do not want to lose the modifications after mains disconnection, save
the new signal configuration under C0003 in one of the parameter sets.
8-10
9300BA0998
Configuration
8.3.4
Entries into the processing table

The 93XX controller provides a certain time for calculating the processing time of
FBs. Since the type and number of FBs to be used depends on the application and
can vary strongly, not all available FBs are permanently calculated. A processing
table is therefore provided under code C0465, where only the FBs used are listed.
This means that the drive system is perfectly matched to the task.If further function
blocks are integrated into an existing configuration, these must be listed in the
processing table.
Several aspects must be observed:
The number of FBs to be processed is limited
A maximum of 50 FBs can be integrated into a configuration.Every FB requires a
certain processing time. Code C0466 displays the residual time for the processing
of FBs. If this time has elapsed no further FBs can be integrated.
Entry sequence into the FBs
Normally, the entry sequence under C0465 is arbitrary, but it may be important for
applications with high response. In general, the most favourable sequence is
adapted to the signal flow.
Example:
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
DIGIN
C0114/1...5
0
1
C0820/1
DIGIN1
DIGIN2
DIGIN3
C0820/2
DIGIN4
DIGIN5
C0443
C0820/3
C0821/1
AND1-IN2
&
AND1-OUT
C0821/2
AND1-IN3
C0821/3
C0830/1
C0830/2
FIXED0
AND1
AND1-IN1
C0830/3
DIGOUT1
DIGOUT2
DIGOUT3
DIGOUT4
C0444/1
C0444/2
C0444/3
C0444/4
DIGOUT
C0118/1...4
0
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
OR1
OR1-IN1
C0831/1
OR1-IN2
C0117/1
C0117/2
C0117/3
C0117/4
OR1-OUT
C0831/2
OR1-IN3
C0831/3
C0822/1
C0822/2
FIXED1
C0822/3
AND2
AND2-IN1
C0823/1
AND2-IN2
&
AND2-OUT
C0823/2
AND2-IN3
C0823/3
FIG 8-5
Example of a configuration
9300BA0998
8-11
Configuration
Structure of the processing table for the configuration example FIG 8-5:
1. DIGIN does not have to entered into the processing table
2. The first FB is AND1, since it receives its input signals from DIGIN and
only has successors.
3. The second FB is OR1, since its signal source is the output of AND1
(predecessor). This means that the output signal in AND1 must be
generated first, before it can be processed in OR1. At the same time,
OR1 has a successor.This means that OR1 must be entered in the
processing table before the successor.
4. The third FB is AND2, since it has a predecessor (see 3.)
5. The entries in C0465 are:
- Position 10: AND1 10500
- Position 11: OR1 10550
- Position 12: AND2 10505
This example was started with position 10, because these positions are not
assigned in the default setting.
FBs do not have to be entered consecutively in the processing table. Empty
positions in the processing table are permissible.
Tip!
Other FBs can also be entered between the FBs listed in the example.
FBs which do not have to be entered into the processing table

The following signal sources are always executed and do not have to be entered
into the processing table:
- AIF-IN
- CANx-IN
- DIGIN
- DIGOUT
- FCODE (all free codes)
- MCTRL
- fixed signal sources (FIXED0, FIXED0%, etc.)
8-12
9300BA0998
Configuration
Frequent faults in the configuration

Malfunction
Cause
Remedy
FB does not supply an output signal
FB was not entered into the processing

table C0465
Enter FB
FB only supplies constant signals
FB was deleted from or overwritten in the

processing table
Enter FB again, possibly under a different

subcode (position)
The output signal does not arrive at the

following FB
No connection between the function

blocks
Make connection (from the view of the

next FB) by the configuration code (CFG)
FB cannot be entered in the table C0465
Residual process time is too short (see

C0466)
Remove FBs not used (e.g. inputs and

outputs not used)
In networked drives, functions may be relocated to other controllers
The controller outputs internally calculated

signals with a delay
FBs are processed in an incorrect sequence
Adapt processing table under C0465 to

the signal flow
9300BA0998
8-13
Configuration
8.4
Description of function blocks

Table of exisiting function blocks
8-14
Function
bl k
block
Description
p
AND1
AND2
AND3
AND4
AND5
AND6
AND7
OR1
OR2
OR3
OR4
OR5
NOT1
NOT2
NOT3
NOT4
NOT5
R/L/Q
FLIP1
FLIP2
DIGDEL1
DIGDEL2
DIGIN
DIGOUT
AIN1
AIN2
AOUT1
AOUT2
FCNT1
FEVAN1
FEVAN2
CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
ASW1
ASW2
ASW3
ASW4
ANEG1
ANEG2
PT1-1
ARIT1
ARIT2
ARITPH1
LIM1
Logic AND, block1

Logic AND, block2
Logic AND, block3
Logic AND, block4
Logic AND, block5
Logic AND, block6
Logic AND, block7
Logic OR, block1
Logic OR, block2
Logic OR, block3
Logic OR, block4
Logic OR, block5
Logic NOT, block1
Logic NOT, block2
Logic NOT, block3
Logic NOT, block4
Logic NOT, block5
QSP / set-value inversion
D-Flipflop 1
D-Flipflop 2
Binary delay element 1
Binary delay element 2
Input terminals X5/E1X5/E5
Output terminals X5/A1X5/A4
Analog input X6/1, X6/2
Analog input X6/3, X6/4
Analog output X6/62
Analog output X6/63
Counter
Comparator 1
Comparator 2
Comparator 3
Analog changeover 1
Analog changeover 2
Analog changeover 3
Analog change-over 4
Analog inverter 1
Analog inverter 2
First order time-delay element
Arithmetic block 1
Arithmetic block 2
32-bBit arithmetic block
Limiter
9300BA0998
CPU time used in base configuration C0005

[ms]
1000 4000 5000 6000 7000
7
20
-
21
-
15
9
7
10
11
29
13
11
4
9
12
15
6
Configuration
Function
block
Description
ADD1
ABS1
FIXSET1
DFIN
DFOUT
DFSET
DCTRL
MCTRL
NSET
MPOT1
PCTRL1
REF
RFG1
SRFG1
SYNC1
GEARCOMP
DT1-1
DFRFG1
MFAIL
BRK
TRANS1
TRANS2
TRANS3
TRANS4
MONIT
MLP1
S&H
STORE1
STORE2
DB1
CONV1
CONV2
CONV3
CONV4
CONV5
CONV6
CONVPHA1
CONVPHPH1
CONVPP1
Addition block
Absolute value generator
Fixed set-values
Device control
Servo control
Speed set-value conditioning
Motor potentiometer
Process controller
Homing function
Ramp generator
S-shaped ramp generator
Multi-axis positioning
Gearbox torsion
Differential element
Digital frequency ramp generator
Mains failure detection
Trigger holding brake
Binary flank evaluation
Monitoring
Motor phase failure detection
Sample and Hold
Memory 1
Memory 2
Dead band
Conversion
Conversion
Conversion
Conversion
Conversion
Conversion
32-bit conversion
32-bit conversion
32-bit / 16-bit conversion

[ms]
1000 4000 5000 6000 7000
9
5
10
6
38
93
77
22
63
110
18
15
55
1
13
44
20
-
21
-
17
8
30
5
35
20
8
9
6
80
55
9300BA0998
8-15
Configuration
Function
block
Description
PHADD1
PHCMP1
PHCMP2
PHCMP3
PHINT1
PHINT2
PHINT2
PHDIFF
32-bit addition block

Comparator
Comparator
Comparator
Phase integrator
Phase integrator
Phase integrator
32-bit comparison between setpoint and
actual value
Conversion
Fieldbus
System bus
Free control codes
PHDIV1
AIF-OUT
CAN-OUT
FCODE 17
FCODE 26/1
FCODE 26/2
FCODE 27/1
FCODE 27/2
FCODE 32
FCODE 37
FCODE 108/1
FCODE 108/2
FCODE 109/1
FCODE 109/2
FCODE 141
FCODE 175
FCODE 250
FCODE 471
FCODE 472/1
FCODE 472/2
FCODE 472/3
FCODE 472/4
FCODE 472/5
FCODE 472/6
FCODE 472/7
FCODE 472/8
FCODE 472/9
FCODE 472/10
FCODE 472/11
FCODE 472/12
FCODE 472/13
FCODE 472/14
FCODE 472/15
FCODE 472/16
FCODE 472/17
FCODE 472/18
FCODE 472/19
FCODE 472/20
8-16
9300BA0998

[ms]
1000 4000 5000 6000 7000
10
9
20
21
-
10
9
60
-
Configuration
Function
block
FCODE 473/1
FCODE 473/2
FCODE 473/3
FCODE 473/4
FCODE 473/5
FCODE 473/6
FCODE 473/7
FCODE 473/8
FCODE 473/9
FCODE 473/10
FCODE 474/1
FCODE 474/2
FCODE 474/3
FCODE 474/4
FCODE 474/5
FCODE 475/2
Description

[ms]
1000 4000 5000 6000 7000
-
20
21
-
9300BA0998
8-17
Configuration
8.5
Monitoring
Various monitoring functions protect the drive from impermissible operating
conditions.
If a monitoring function is released,
- the corresponding set reaction is triggered (see chapter 8.5.1).
- a digital output is set if it is assigned to the corresponding reaction.
- the fault indication is entered at the first position in the history buffer (see
chapter 9.2).
8.5.1
Reactions
The controller can react to interference in four different ways:
- TRIP (highest priority)
- Message
- Warning
- OFF=no reaction (lowest priority)
For some operating faults you can determine the reaction of the controller (see
chapter 8.5.2).
TRIP
Status indications of the operating module in case of TRIP
RDY
IMP
P
3
3 : on
P : off
FAIL
3
H : flashing
Drive behaviour:
- Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high resistance until TRIP-Reset is
done
- The drive is idling (no control!).
- After TRIP reset (see chapter 9.4) the drive accelerates to its setpoint along
the set ramps.
8-18
9300BA0998
Configuration
Message
Status indications of the operating module in case of message
RDY
IMP
P
3
3 : on
P : off
FAIL
3
H : flashing
Drive behaviour:
- Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high resistance as long as the fault
is active.
- Short-term fault $0.5 s:
- The drive is idling (no control!), as long as the fault is active.
- If the fault is eliminated, the drive moves to its set-value with maximum
torque.
- Long-term fault 0.5 s
- The drive is idling (no control!) as long as the fault is active
- Homing points are lost
- If the fault is eliminated, the drive accelerates to its setpoint along the set
ramps.
Danger!
The drive restarts automatically if the fault is eliminated.
Warnung
Status indication of the operating module in case of warning
RDY
IMP
3
P
3 : on
P : off
FAIL
3
H: flashing
Drive behaviour:
- The drive operates under control.
OFF
- No reaction on operating faults! Monitoring is deactivated.
Stop!
If monitoring functions are deactivated, the drive can be destroyed.
9300BA0998
8-19
Configuration
8.5.2
Monitoring functions
Overview of the fault sources detected by the controller, and the corresponding
reactions.
Fault indication
Display
CCr
CE0
CE1
CE2
CE3
CE4
EEr
H05
H07
H10
H11
LP1
LU
NMAX
OC1
OC2
OC5
OH
OH3
OH4
OH7
OH8
OU
P03
P13
P16
PEr
PI
PR0
PR1
PR2
PR3
PR4
8-20
LECOM
T: 71
T: 61
W: 2061
T: 62
W: 2062
T: 63
W: 2063
T: 64
W: 2064
T: 65
W: 2065
T: 91
W: 2091
M: 1091
T: 105
T: 107
T: 110
W: 2110
T: 111
W: 2111
T: 32
M: 1030
T: 200
T: 11
T: 12
T: 15
T: 50
T: 53
W: 2054
W: 2057
T: 58
W: 2058
M: 1020
T: 153
W: 2153
T: 163
W: 2163
T: 166
W: 2166
T: 74
T: 79
T: 75
T: 72
T: 73
T: 77
T: 78
9300BA0998
Possible reactions
Meaning
System fault
Communication error (AIF)
T
T
M
-
W
T
off
-
Code
C0126
Communication error at the process data input object

CAN-IN1 (time monitoring can be set under C0357/1)
BUS-OFF state (many communication errors occurred)
C0591
C0592
C0593
C0595
External monitoring
C0581
Internal fault
Internal fault
Sensor fault: heat sink temperature
C0588
Sensor fault: indoor temperature
Motor phase failure detection (function block must be

entered in C0465)
Undervoltage
Maximum speed exceeded (C0596)
Short-circuit
Earth fault
I x t overload
Heat sink temperature 1 (max. permissible, fixed)
Motor temperature 1 (max. permissible, fixed)
Heat sink temperature 2 (adjustable; C0122)
Motor temperature 2 (can be set; code: C0121)
Motor temperature (fixed) via inputs T1/T2
C0597
T*
T
T
T
-
C0583
C0582
C0584
C0585
Overvoltage in the DC bus

Contouring error
C0589
Phase overflow
C0590
Sync error
C1290/1
Program error
Fault during initialization
General fault in parameter sets
Fault in parameter set 1
Configuration
Fault indication
Display
Sd2
Sd3
Sd5
Sd6
Sd7
LECOM
T: 82
W: 2082
T: 83
W: 2083
T: 85
W: 2085
T: 86
W:2086
T: 87
Possible reactions
Meaning
Resolver fault
T
-
M
-
W
T*
off
T
Code
C0586
Encoder fault at X9 PIN 8
T*
C0587
Encoder fault at X6/1 X6/2 (C0034 = 1)
C0598
Sensor fault: motor temperature (X7 or X8)
C0594
Fault in the absolute value encoder at X8
C0025
T: TRIP
M: Message
W: Warning
-: Lenze
T*: possible, but the motor may be destroyed if the fault is not removed immediately
T: possible
-: not possible
Tip!
The information in the row LECOM is read from C0168/x if the history buffer is
accessed via a fieldbus module.
Overcurrent diagram of the fault indication OC5

(100% load)
Ixt diagram
Controller output current *
200%
150%
$

100% thermal continuous current100%

for C0022 150 INx
70% thermal continuous current 70%
for C0022 150% INx
time
10s
60s
120s
180s
* rated controller current 100%

x depending on the chopping frequency of the inverter
FIG 8-6
K35.0151
Max. permitted overcurrent depending on the time
9300BA0998
8-21
Configuration
8.5.3
Fault display via digital output

You can assign the fault indications TRIP, message, and warning in the function
block DIGOUT to digital outputs (e.g. the terminals X5/A10 X5/A4).
Display TRIP or Message or Warning individually (individual indication):
1. Select digital output in the code level under C0117 and subcode.
2. Assign TRIP or Message or Warning to the parameter level.
Display TRIP, Message, Warning collectively (collective indication):
1. Assign TRIP, Message and Warning to an OR element.
3. Assign output of the OR-element in the parameter level.
Display monitoring functions individually:
2. Assign monitoring function (e.g. MONIT-OH7).
8-22
9300BA0998
Troubleshooting and fault elimination

- You can recognize immediately whether a fault has occurred by display
elements or status information (see chapter 9.1).
- You can analyze the fault using the history buffer (chapter 9.2) and the list in
chapter 9.3.
- The list in chapter 9.3 indicates how to eliminate the fault.
9.1
Troubleshooting
Display on the controller
Two LEDs indicate the controller status.
LED green
LED red
Check
Controller enabled; no fault
C0183; possibly C0168/1
C0168/1
3 : on
P : off
H: flashing
Display on the operating module

Status messages in the display indicate the controller status.
FAIL = 3 : TRIP or Message or Warning is active
FAIL
RDY
IMP
Check
Controller enabled; no fault
C0168/1
C0183
C0183
C0168/1
C0168/1
3 : on
P : off
Display via the LECOM status word C0150

Four bits of the status word indicate the controller status.
Bit 7
Ctrl. enable
Bit 12
Warning
Bit 13
Message
Bit 15
Ready for
operation
Check
C0183
C0168/1
C0168/1
C0168/1
C0168/1
9300BA0998
9-1
9.2
Fault analysis with the history buffer

The history buffer is used to trace faults. The fault messages are stored in thehistory
buffer in the order of their occurrence.
Tip!
The codes of the history buffer are contained in the menu Diagnostics
9.2.1
Structure of the history buffer

- The history buffer has eight memory units which can be requested by
subcodes.
- The first memory unit (subcode 1) contains information about the active
fault.
- The history buffer is written only after the fault has been eliminated or
acknowledged. The last fault but six is eliminated from the history buffer
and can no longer be read.
- The memory units 1 to 7 contain information on the last to the last fault but
six.
- For every fault occurred, certain information is stored which can be retrieved
by codes:
Code and information to be called
C0168
Fault recognition
and reaction
9-2
9300BA0998
C0169
Time of the last

occurrence
Memory unit
C0170
Frequency of a
fault immediately
followed byy the
same fault
f l
Subcode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Active fault
Memory unit 1
Memory unit 2
Memory unit 3
Memory unit 4
Memory unit 5
Memory unit 6
History buffer unit 7
9.2.2
Working with the history buffer

Fault recognition and reaction
- C0168 contains the fault recognition for every memory unit and the reaction
on the fault.
- It is entered as LECOM fault number (see chapter 8.5.2).
Please note:
- If there are several faults with different reactions:
- Only the reaction with the higest priority (TRIP Message Warning) is
entered.
- If there are faults with the same reaction (e.g. 2 messages) simultaneously:
- Only the fault which occurred first is entered.
Time
- The times when the faults occurred are entered under C0169:
- Reference time is the state of the mains switch-on elapsed-time meter
(C0179).
Please note:
- If a fault is immediately followed by another several times, only the time of
the last occurrence is stored.
Frequency
- The frequency of a fault immediately followed by the same fault is entered
under C0170. The time of the last occurrence is stored.
Clear history buffer
Set C0167 = 1 to clear the history buffer.
9300BA0998
9-3
9.3
Fault indications
Tip!
If the fault indication is requested by a fieldbus, a LECOM no. is read from C0168/x
instead of the abbreviation. The meaning of the LECOM no. is listed in chapter 8.5.2
Monitoring functions.
Display
--CCr
Fault
No fault
System fault
Cause
Strong interference on control cables
Ground or earth loops in the wiring
CE0
Communication error
CE1
Communication error in
the process data object
CAN_IN_1
Interference during transmission of control

commands via automation interface X1
CAN_IN_1 object receives faulty data or
communication is interrupted
CE2
CAN_IN_2

CE3
CAN_IN_3

CE4
BUS-OFF state
Controller has received too many incorrect

telegrams by system bus X4 and has
disconnected from the bus
EEr
External fault (TRIP-Set)
A digital input assigned to the TRIP set

function has been activated
H05
H07
Internal fault
Incorrect power stage
H10
Sensor fault: heat sink

temperature
Sensor fault: indoor
temperature
Motor phase failure
H11
LP1
9-4
LU
Undervoltage
N MAX
max. plant speed

exceeded (C0596)
9300BA0998
During initialization of the controller, an

incorrect power stage was detected
Sensor of heat sink temperature detection
indicates indefinite values
Sensor of the indoor temperature detection
indicates indefinite values
A current-carrying motor phase has failed
The current limit is set too low
This monitoring is not suitable for:
- Synchronous servo motors
- for field frequencies > 480 Hz
DC bus voltage is smaller than the value fixed
under C0173
Active load (e.g. for hoists) too high
Drive is not speed-controlled, torque
excessively limited
Remedy
Screen control cables
PE wiring (see chapter 4.3 Installation of a
CE-typical drive system)
Plug in automation module firmly, bolt down if
necessary
Check cable at X4
Check transmitter
Increase monitoring time under C0357/1 if
necessary
Check cable at X4
Check transmitter
necessary
Check cable at X4
Check transmitter
necessary
Check wiring
Check bus terminator (if any)
Check screen contact of the cables
Check PE connection
Check bus load:
Reduce baud rate (observe cable length)
Check external encoder
Contact Lenze
Contact Lenze
Contact Lenze
Contact Lenze
Check motor;
Check supply cables
Set a higher current limit under C0599
Deactivate monitoring with C0597= 3
Check mains voltage

Check supply cable
Check drive dimensioning.
Increase torque limit if necessary
Display
OC1
OC2
OC5
OH
OH3 1)
OH4
OH7 1)
OH8
OU
P03
P13
Fault
Short-circuit
Cause
Short-circuit
Excessive capacitive charging current of the
motor cable
Earth fault
One of the motor phases has earth contact
Excessive capacitive charging current of the
motor cable
I x t overload
Frequent and too long acceleration processes
with overcurrent
Permanent overload with IMotor > 1.05 x INx
Heat sink temperature is Ambient temperature
higher than the value set T a > 40 C or 50 C
in the controller
Remedy
Find out cause of short circuit; check cable
Use motor cable which is shorter or of lower
capacitance
Check motor; check cable
Use motor cable which is shorter or of lower
capacitance
Allow controller to cool and ensure better

ventilation
Check ambient temperature in the control
cabinet
Clean heat sink
Heat sink very dirty
Change mounting position
Incorrect mounting position
Motor temperature is
Motor too hot because of excessive current or Check drive dimensioning.
higher than the value
frequent and too long acceleration
set in the controller
No PTC connected
Connect PTC or switch off monitoring
(C0583= 3)
Heat sink temperature is Ambient temperature
Allow controller to cool and ensure better
higher than the value set T a > 40 C or 50 C
ventilation
under C0122
Check ambient temperature in the control
cabinet
Clean heat sink
Heat sink very dirty
Change mounting position
Incorrect mounting position
Enter higher value
Value set under C0122 was too low
Motor temperature is
Motor too hot because of excessive current or Check drive dimensioning.
higher than the value
set under C0121
No PTC connected
Connect PTC or switch off monitoring
(C0584= 3)
Value set under C0121 was too low
Enter higher value
PTC at terminals T1, T2 Motor too hot because of excessive current or Check drive dimensioning.
indicates motor
overheat
Terminals T1, T2 are not assigned
Connect PTC or thermostat or switch off
monitoring (C0585= 3)
Overvoltage
Excessive braking energy (DC bus voltage
Use brake module or energy recovery module
higher than the value set under C0173)
Contouring error
Phase difference between set and actual
Extend contouring error limit with C0255
position is larger than the contouring error
Switch off monitoring if necessary (C0589 =
limit set under C0255
3)
Drive cannot follow digital frequency (Imaxlimit)
Phase overflow
Phase controller limit reached
Enable drive
Drive cannot follow digital frequency (Imaxlimit) Check drive dimensioning
9300BA0998
9-5
Display
Fault
Cause
The time between two sync telegrams is
faulty
Transmission error of a
sync telegram on the
system bus
P16
Transmission
T
i i error off a
sync telegram via
terminal
PEr
Program interference
PI
Initializing error
PR0
PR1
PR2
PR3
PR4
Sd2
Parameter set error
Resolver fault
Resolver cable interrupted
Sd3
Encoder fault at X9/8
Cable interrupted
Input X9 PIN 8 not assigned
Sd5
Master current at X6/1 X6/2 < 2mA
Sd6
Master current source

defective
Sensor fault
Sd7
Encoder fault
Absolute encoder with RS485 interface does

not transmit data
1)
9-6
Remedy
C0362 display the delay between two sync
telegrams (C0362 = 0, communication
interrupted)
- Set the time in C1121 = set time in C0362
- Adapt the time of the sync telegram from
the master
Sync telegram from the master (PLC) does not - Check communication channel
arrive
- Check baud rate, controller address
The controller was enabled before the
Repeat mains connection and wait for
initialization was completed
initializing
The controller was enabled before the
Repeat mains connection and wait for
initialization was completed
initializing
No synchronization signal
Connect synchonization signal to terminal X10
E5
The period of the synchronization signal is not Adapt period
a multiple of 1 ms
A fault in the program was detected
Send controller with data (on diskette) to
Lenze
A fault was detected during parameter set
Correct parameter set
transfer between the controllers
Parameter set does not match with the
controller
Fault when reading a parameter set
Set the desired parameters and save under
C0003
CAUTION:
For PRO the supply voltage must be switched
The factory setting is loaded automatically
off additionally
9300BA0998
Encoder of the motor temperature detection

at X7 or X8 indicates undefined values
Temperature detection via resolver or incremental encoder
Check resolver cable for open circuit

Check resolver
or switch off monitoring (C0586 = 3)
Check cable for open circuit
Assign input X9 PIN 8 with 5V or switch off
monitoring (C0587 = 3)
Check cable for open circuit
Check master current source
Check supply cable for firm connection
Switch off monitoring with C0594 = 3 if
necessary
Check supply cable
Check encoder
Check voltage supply C0421
No Stegmann encoder connected
9.4
Rest of fault indications

TRIP
- After eliminating the fault, the pulse inhibit is only reset after
acknowledgement of TRIP.
- Acknowledge TRIP by:
- Operating module:
Press STOP key.
Then press RUN to enable the controller again.
- LECOM: Set C0043 to 0
- Control word C0135
- Terminal X5/E5
- Control word AIF
- Control word system bus
Tip!
If a TRIP source is still active, the TRIP cannot be reset.
Message
- After eliminating the fault, the pulse inhibit is reset automatically.
9300BA0998
9-7
9-8
9300BA0998
Maintenance
10 Maintenance
- The controller is free of maintenance if the prescribed conditions of
operation are observed (see chapter 3.2).
- If the ambient air is polluted, the air vents of the controller may be
obstructed. Check the air vents periodically (depending on the degree of
pollution approx. every four weeks):
- Free the obstructed air vents using a vacuum cleaner.
Stop!
Do not use sharp or pointed tools such as a knife or screwdriver to clean the air
vents.
9300BA0998
10-1
Maintenance
10-2
9300BA0998
Appendix
11 Appendix
11.1
Accessories
For the controllers, Lenze offers the following accessories:
- Mains filters
- Fuses
- Fuse holders
- System cable for resolver
- System cable for digital frequency coupling
A PC can be connected to the controller via the field bus module LECOMA/B
(RS232, RS485 or fibre optics). The controller can be easily parameterized using
the Global Drive Control or LEMOC2 PC programs.
PC program Global Drive Control

The program runs under Windows and is supplied with drivers for LECOMA/B
(RS232, RS485 or fibre optics).
Further functions of the PC program:
- Process signal visualization
- Diagnostics and troubleshooting
- Commissioning support
- Oscilloscope function
9300BA0998
11-1
Appendix
11.2
Application examples
11.2.1
Speed control
The most important settings (short setup)
Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: Short Setup / Speed mode of the
operating module or Global Drive Control or LEMOC 2.
Input motor type (contains all nameplate data of the motor)

C0173
C0086
xxx
xxx
Enter UG limit (mains voltage)

Enter LENZE motor type
Enter maximum motor current

C0022
xxxA
Determine Imax
Enter controller configuration

C0005
C0025
1000
xxx
Select speed control

Enter feedback system
Speed setpoint settings

C0011
C0012
C0013
C0105
xxx rpm
xxx s
xxx s
xxx s
Determine max. speed

Set acceleration time
Set deceleration time
Set QSP deceleration time
Application parameters
C0070
C0071
xxx
xxx
Vp n controller
Tn n-controller
Save parameters
C0003
11-2
9300BA0998
xxx
Save all parameters
FIG 12-1
DIGIN1
C0027/1
C0896
C0891
FIXED0%
FIXED0%
X8
X7
ENCODER
RESOLVER
C0897
C0898
C0895
FIXED0
C0894
C0890
C0901
C0902
C0899
FIXED0%
FIXED0INC
FIXED0%
FIXED0
C0892
C0893
*-1
C0906/6
C0907/1
C0906/5
C0420
C0490
C0495
C0025
C0051
Actual speed
C0906/7
MCTRL-FLD-WEAK C0906/2
MCTRL-M-ADD
MCTRL-N2-LIM
MCTRL-PHI-ON
MCTRL-PHI-LIM
C0908
C0254
C0011
Phase controller
MCTRL-PHI-SET
C0906/1
100%
C0906/8
C0907/4
C0907/2
C0906/3
C0906/4
C0907/3
QSP decel. ramp
MCTRL-N-SET
C0105
MCTRL-I-SET
MCTRL-I-LOAD
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
DCTRL-QSP
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
QSP
MCTRL-NSET2
ASW1
C0812/1
MCTRL-QSP
FIXED0%
ANEG
C0027/2
C0034
C0900
+
+
AIN2
+
+
AIN1
TRIP-RESET
DIGIN5
R/L
TRIP-SET
QSP
R/L/Q
DIGIN4
R/L/Q-QSP
C0026/2
C0026/1
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
DIGIN3
DIGIN
FIXED100%
C0472/3
3
4
X6
1
2
X6
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
X5
C0497
+
+
C0909
0
15
0
15
C0042
NSET-NADD
NSET-NADD-INV
C0046
DMUX
0
+
-
C0799/13
0
1
*-1
0
1
C0130
C0045
C0103/15
C0103/1
C0103/2
C0013
*-1
C0049
C0799/2
C0799/3
C0798/2
TI 0...15
C0101/15
C0101/1
C0101/2
C0012
JOG1...15
C0039/15
C0039/1
C0039/2
C0799/1
Speed
limitation
C0072
C0070
C0071
C0798/1
C0799/12
DMUX
NSET-LOAD
NSET-SET
NSET-TI*1
NSET-TI*2
NSET-TI*4
NSET-TI*8
NSET-JOG*1
NSET-JOG*2
NSET-JOG*4
NSET-JOG*8
NSET-N
NSET-N-INV
NSET-RFG-0
NSET-RFG-STOP
NSET-CINH-VAL
Speed controller
C0782
C0783
C0786
C0785
C0788/1
C0788/2
C0788/3
C0788/4
C0787/1
C0787/2
C0787/3
C0787/4
C0780
C0781
C0789
C0790
C0784
MCTRL-NACT
CONST
C0086
C0134
C0182
S- shape
C0241
NSET-NOUT
NSET-RFG-I=0
200%
Linking of
main and
additional setpoint
X/(1-Y)
X
Y +
C0190
NSET
MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-DCVOLT
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-MMAX
MCTRL-NSET2
C0018
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0006
C0022
C0075
C0076
C0077
C0078
C0081
C0084
C0085
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
C0091
VECT-CTRL PWM
C0056
C0050
Current controller
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL
C0680
C0681
C0683/1
CMP1
C0017
FIXED0
FIXED-PHI-0
Ramp generator additional setpoint
CINH
Torque
limitation
C0220/
C0221
CINH
Ramp generator main setpoint
X8
X9
C0547
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
RDY
MMAX
TRIP
NACT=0
C0548
DIGOUT
2
3
4
5
C0540
DFOUT-OUT
A1
A2
A3
A4
X5
DFOUT
C0434/2
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
AOUT1-GAIN
62
X6
63
X6
X10
C434/1 AOUT1
+
AOUT1-IN
C0439/2
C0439/3
AOUT2-OFFSET
AOUT2-GAIN
C439/1 AOUT2
+
AOUT2-IN
C0118/1...4
C0545
CTRL
C0030
C0540
DIGOUT1
DIGOUT2
DIGOUT3
DIGOUT4
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
X5 E5
C0544
C0541
C0542
DFOUT-DF-IN
C0432
C0433
C0431
C0437
C0438
C0436
Appendix
Signal flow chart of configuration 1000
9300BA0998
11-3
Appendix
Main switch
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Fuses for
cable protection
OFF
ON
Mains contactor K1
K1
Mains choke
LK
RB
K1
F1 F2
L1 L2 L3
PE
+UG -UG
93XX
-UG +UG PE
9352
U V W
PE
X6
X7
1 2
+
=
-
3 4
PE
RFR
X5
28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
39 A1 A2 A3 A4 59
RB1 RB2
K1
3~
RB
QSP
RB
TRIP-SET
Motor
FIG 12-2
Connection diagram of configuration 1000
Tip!
A brake unit is required only if the DC bus voltage of the 93XX servo inverter in the
generator mode exceeds the upper switch-off threshold set under C0173
(activation of the OU monitoring function).The brake unit avoids the activation of
OU by converting the kinetic energy of the machine into heat and thus keeps the
DC bus voltage below the upper switch-off threshold.
11-4
9300BA0998
Appendix
11.2.2
Torque control with speed limitation

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: Short Setup / Torque mode of the

C0173
C0086
xxx
xxx


C0022
xxxA
Determine Imax

C0005
C0025
4000
xxx
Select torque control


C0011
C0105
xxx rpm
xxx s

Set QSP deceleration time
Speed limitation
C0472/4
xxx % nmax
Determine lower speed limit
C0070
C0071
xxx
xxx
Vp n controller
Tn n-controller
Save parameters
C0003
xxx
Save all parameters
9300BA0998
11-5
11-6
9300BA0998
FIG 12-3
C0472/3
3
4
X6
1
2
X6
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
X5
+
+
AIN2
+
+
C0896
C0472/4
X8
X7
ENCODER
RESOLVER
FIXED100%
C0897
FIXED0
C0898
C0891
C0895
C0894
C0890
C0901
C0902
C0899
C0892
C0893
C0900
C0027/2
FIXED0%
FIXED0INC
FIXED0%
FIXED0
*-1
ANEG
C0027/1
C0906/6
C0907/1
C0906/5
C0420
C0490
C0495
C0025
C0051
Act. speed
C0906/7
MCTRL-M-ADD
MCTRL-N2-LIM
MCTRL-PHI-ON
MCTRL-PHI-LIM
C0908
C0254
100%
C0906/8
C0907/4
C0907/2
C0906/3
C0906/4
1
0
C0011
Phase controller
MCTRL-PHI-SET
C0906/1
QSP decel. ramp
MCTRL-N-SET
C0105
MCTRL-I-SET
MCTRL-I-LOAD
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
C0907/3
DCTRL-QSP
FIXED0
C0497
+
+
C0909
0
15
0
15
C0042
NSET-NADD
NSET-NADD-INV
C0046
DMUX
0
+
-
C0799/13
0
1
*-1
C0130
C0049
C0799/2
C0799/3
C0798/2
TI 0...15
C0045
C0103/15
C0103/1
C0103/2
C0101/15
C0013
C0101/1
C0101/2
*-1
C0134
C0182
*
NSET-NOUT
NSET-RFG-I=0
200%
C0241
x/(1-y)
x
y +
C0190
Linking of main
and additional
setpoint
NSET
CONST
C0086
MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-DCVOLT
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-MMAX
MCTRL-NSET2
C0018
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0006
C0022
C0075
C0076
C0077
C0078
C0081
C0084
C0085
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
C0091
VECT-CTRL PWM
C0056
C0050
Current controller
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL
C0680
C0681
C0683/1
CMP1
C0017
FIXED0
FIXED-PHI-0
Ramp generator additional setpoint
CINH
Torque
limitation
C0220/
C0221
CINH
S- shape
Ramp generator main setpoint
C0012
JOG1...15
C0039/15
C0039/1
C0039/2
C0799/1
Speed
limitation
C0072
C0070
C0071
C0798/1
C0799/12
DMUX
NSET-LOAD
NSET-SET
NSET-TI*1
NSET-TI*2
NSET-TI*4
NSET-TI*8
NSET-JOG*1
NSET-JOG*2
NSET-JOG*4
NSET-JOG*8
NSET-N
NSET-N-INV
NSET-RFG-0
NSET-RFG-STOP
NSET-CINH-VAL
Speed controller
C0782
C0783
C0786
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
C0788/1
C0788/2
C0788/3
C0788/4
C0787/1
C0787/2
C0787/3
C0787/4
C0780
C0781
C0789
C0790
C0784
C0785
FIXED0
QSP
MCTRL-NACT
MTCRL-NSET2
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
MCTRL-QSP
C0034
TRIP-SET
TRIP-RESET
R/L
DIGIN4
QSP
DIGIN5
AIN1
R/L/Q-QSP
C0026/2
C0026/1
DIGIN1
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
DIGIN3
DIGIN
R/L/Q
X8
X9
C0547
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
RDY
MMAX
TRIP
NACT=0
C0548
2
3
4
5
C0540
DIGOUT
A1
A2
A3
A4
X5
DFOUT
DFOUT-OUT
C0434/2
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
AOUT1-GAIN
C434/1 AOUT1
+
AOUT1-IN
C0439/2
C0439/3
AOUT2-OFFSET
AOUT2-GAIN
C439/1 AOUT2
+
AOUT2-IN
C0118/1...4
C0545
CTRL
C0030
C0540
DIGOUT1
DIGOUT2
DIGOUT3
DIGOUT4
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
X5 E5
C0544
C0541
C0542
DFOUT-DF-IN
C0432
C0433
C0431
C0437
C0438
C0436
X10
62
X6
63
X6
Appendix
Appendix
11.2.3
Digital frequency - master

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: Short Setup / DF master of the

C0173
C0086
xxx
xxx


C0022
xxxA
Determine Imax

C0005
C0025
5000
5900
xxx
Digital frequency - master in general

with emergency stop for the drive network for QSP

C0011
C0012
C0013
C0105
C0672
C0032
C0033
C0473/1
C0533
xxx rpm
xxx s
xxx s
xxx s
xxx s
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx

Set acceleration time
Set deceleration time
Set QSP deceleration time for C0005 = 5000
Set QSP deceleration time for C0005 = 59xx
Gearbox factor numerator
Gearbox factor denominator
Numerator of the stretch factor
Denominator of the stretch factor
C0070
C0071
C0254
xxx
xxx
xxx
Vp n controller
Tn n-controller
Gain of the phase controller
Save parameters
C0003
xxx
Save all parameters
9300BA0998
11-7
11-8
9300BA0998
FIG 12-4
FIXED0
C0830/2
QSP
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
28
X5
C0831/3
OR1-IN3
C0831/2
OR1-IN2
C0831/1
OR1-IN1
+
+
OR1
OR1-OUT
C0443
QSP
C0521
C0473/1
C0473/3
C0522
C0032
DFSET-A-TRIM
X5
E5
X5
E4
2
1
2
1
C0782
C0783
NSET-NADD
C0530
Set phase
C0535
*
C0529
C0534
C0049
C0799/2
C0799/3
C0798/2
TI 0...15
*-1
+
+
+
+
C0253
C0528/2
C0252
-
Phase offset
DFSET
C0220/
C0221
DFSET-PSET
DFSET-NOUT
DFSET-POUT
DFSET-ACK
C0528/1
*-1
0
1
C0130
C0045
C0103/15
C0103/1
C0103/2
C0101/1
C0101/2
C0101/15
C0013
C0012
JOG1...15
C0039/15
C0039/1
C0039/2
C0799/1
CTRL
0
15
Phase trimming
0
15
Phase trimming=f(n)
C0536/3
C0538/2
C0538/3
a
a
b
b
C0033
C0536/2
C0537
DMUX
C0046
NSET-NADD-INV
C0531
C0799/13
C0798/1
C0799/12
DMUX
NSET-LOAD
NSET-SET
NSET-TI*1
NSET-TI*2
NSET-TI*4
NSET-TI*8
NSET-JOG*1
NSET-JOG*2
NSET-JOG*4
NSET-JOG*8
NSET-N
NSET-N-INV
NSET-RFG-0
NSET-RFG-STOP
NSET-CINH-VAL
Speed
C0532
trimming
a
a
b
b
C0533
DFSET-RESET
DFSET-SET
C0539
DFSET-IN
C0536/1
DFSET-VP-DIV
DFSET-RAT-DIV
DFSET-N-TRIM
X9/6,7
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
C0538/1
DFSET-0-PULSE
TRIP-SET
TRIP-RESET
C0523
C0526
C0527
C0520
C0524
C0525
FIXDE0
ASW1
C0812/1
C0786
C0785
MCTRL-NSET2
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
C0788/1
C0788/2
C0788/3
C0788/4
C0787/1
C0787/2
C0787/3
C0787/4
C0780
C0781
C0789
C0790
C0784
FIXED0
C0472/5
C0027/2
FIXED0%
C0034
C0027/1
DCTRL -X5/28
DIGIN-CINH
AIN2
+
+
AIN1
DIGIN1
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
DIGIN3
0
DIGIN4
1
1
DIGIN5
DIGIN
C0830/3
C0830/1
C0026/2
C0026/1
RSP
3
4
X6
1
2
X6
FIXED0
MCTRL-NACT
C0134
C0182
C0474/1
CINH
CINH
C0922
C0923
C0920
C0921
C0924
C0925
C0928
C0929
REF-PHI-IN
REF-N-IN
C0927/1
REF-ON
C0927/2
C0927/3
REF-MARK
C0926/1
REF-POS-LOAD
NSET-NOUT
CTRL
C0926/3
C0926/4
C0933
C0932
C0930
C0931
C0934
C0935
C0936
NSET-RFG-I=0
200%
C0241
x/(1-y)
REF-ACTPOS-IN
x
y +
C0190
NSET
REF-PSET
REF-N-SET
REF-OK
REF-BUSY
REF
FIXED0
FIXEDPHI-0
X8
X9
C0547
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
DFOUT-DF-IN
C0548
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
X5 E5
C0544
C0541
C0542
C0545
CTRL
C0030
C0540
DFOUT
2
3
4
5
C0540
DFOUT-OUT
X10
Appendix
C0472/3
DIGIN1
C0900
X8
X7
C0901
C0897
C0896
C0891
C0898
FIXED1
FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED100%
ENCODER
RESOLVER
C0895
C0472/6
C0894
C0890
C0902
FIXED0
C0899
C0892
C0893
FIXED0%
FIXED0
*-1
ANEG
C0906/4
C0906/6
C0907/1
C0906/5
C0420
C0490
C0495
C0025
C0051
Actual speed
C0906/7
MCTRL-M-ADD
MCTRL-N2-LIM
MCTRL-PHI-ON
MCTRL-PHI-LIM
C0908
C0254
C0011
Phase controller
MCTRL-PHI-SET
C0906/1
100%
C0906/8
C0907/4
C0907/2
C0906/3
QSP decel. ramp
MCTRL-N-SET
C0105
MCTRL-I-SET
MCTRL-I-LOAD
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
C0907/3
DCTRL-QSP
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
MCTRL-QSP
C0497
+
+
C0909
+
-
C0072
C0070
C0071
Speed
limitation
Speed controller
C0042
+
+
1
CONST
C0086
MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-DCVOLT
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-MMAX
C0018
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0006
C0022
C0075
C0076
C0077
C0078
C0081
C0084
C0085
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
C0091
VECT-CTRL PWM
C0056
C0050
MCTRL-NSET2
Current controller
Torque limitation
MCTRL
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
C0680
C0681
C0683/1
CMP1
C0017
C0109/1
C0108/1
RDY
TRIP
NACT=0
C0432
C0433
C0431
C0444/1
C0444/2
C0444/3
C0444/4
C0434/2
C0434/3
AOUT1-OFFSET
AOUT1-GAIN
DIGOUT
62
X6
C0118/1...4
C0439/2
C0439/3
AOUT2-OFFSET
DIGOUT1
DIGOUT2
DIGOUT3
DIGOUT4
C0437
C0438
AOUT2-GAIN
C439/1 AOUT2
+
AOUT2-IN
C434/1 AOUT1
+
AOUT1-IN
C0117/1
C0117/2
C0117/3
C0117/4
C0109/2
C0108/2
C0436
A4
A3
A2
A1
X5
63
X6
Appendix
9300BA0998
11-9
Appendix
11.2.4
Digital frequency bus - slave

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: Short Setup / DF slave bus of the

C0173
C0086
xxx
xxx


C0022
xxxA
Determine Imax

C0005
C0025
6000
xxx
Select digital frequency bus - slave


C0011
C0032
C0033
C0425
xxx rpm
xxx
xxx
xxx

Adapt encoder constant to the master
C0070
C0071
C0254
xxx
xxx
xxx
Vp n controller
Tn n-controller
Save parameters
C0003
11-10
9300BA0998
xxx
Save all parameters
FIG 12-5
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
28
X5
QSP
CINH
C0472/3
OR1
*-1
ANEG
X8
X7
C0443
DCTRL -X5/28
DIGIN-CINH
C0425
DFIN
DIGIN1
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
DIGIN3
0
DIGIN4
1
1
DIGIN5
DIGIN
FIXED0
X9
C0901
C0896
C0891
FIXED0%
FIXED0%
ENCODER
RESOLVER
C0898
C0897
FIXED1
FIXED100%
C0895
C0472/6
C0894
C0890
C0902
FIXED0
C0899
FIXED0%
FIXED0
C0892
C0893
C0900
TRIP-SET
TRIP-RESET
DIGIN1
QSP
C0473/3
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
C0906/6
C0907/1
C0906/5
C0420
C0490
C0495
C0025
C0051
C0011
Actual speed
C0906/7
MCTRL-M-ADD
MCTRL-N2-LIM
MCTRL-PHI-ON
MCTRL-PHI-LIM
C0908
C0254
Phase controller
MCTRL-PHI-SET
C0906/1
100%
C0906/8
C0907/4
C0907/2
C0906/3
C0906/4
C0907/3
C0530
*
C0529
C0909
+
-
DFSET-POUT
DFSET-ACK
DFSET
C0528/2
+
+
C0253
-
C0072
C0070
C0071
+
+
act. phase
C0252
DFSET-PSET
DFSET-NOUT
Phase offset
C0528/1
Speed
limitation
C0042
Speed
controller
C0497
+
+
C0534
CTRL
Set phase
Phase trimming
C0535
C0531
Phase trimming=f(n)
C0536/
C0538/2
C0538/3
QSP decel. ramp
MCTRL-N-SET
C0105
MCTRL-I-SET
MCTRL-I-LOAD
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
2
1
2
1
a
a
* b
b
C0033
C0536/2
C0537
DCTRL-QSP
DFSET-A-TRIM
X5
E5
X5
E4
Speed
C0532
trimming
a
a
* b
b
C0533
DFSET-RESET
DFSET-SET
C0539
DFSET-IN
C0536/1
DFSET-VP-DIV
DFSET-RAT-DIV
DFSET-N-TRIM
X9/6,7
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
C0538/1
DFSET-0-PULSE
MCTRL-QSP
C0523
C0526
C0527
C0520
C0522
C0521
C0032
C0524
C0525
C0473/1
C0472/5
FIXED0
C0922
C0923
C0920
C0921
C0924
C0925
CTRL
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL
C0928
C0929
REF-PHI-IN
REF-N-IN
C0927/1
REF-ON
C0927/2
C0927/3
REF-MARK
C0926/1
REF-POS-LOAD
REF-ACTPOS-IN
CONST
MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-DCVOLT
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-MMAX
C0018
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0006
C0022
C0075
C0076
C0077
C0078
C0081
C0084
C0085
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
C0091
VECT-CTRL PWM
C0056
C0050
MCTRL-NSET2
Current controller
C0086
Torque
limitation
C0474/1
C0926/3
C0926/4
C0933
C0932
C0930
C0931
C0934
C0935
C0936
C0680
C0681
C0683/1
CMP1
C0017
REF-PSET
REF-N-SET
REF-OK
REF-BUSY
REF
RDY
TRIP
NACT=0
C0108/2
C0117/1
C0117/2
C0117/3
C0117/4
C434/1
C0109/1
C0118/1...4
DIGOUT
63
X6
62
AOUT1 X6
C0444/1
C0444/2
C0444/3
C0444/4
DIGOUT1
DIGOUT2
DIGOUT3
DIGOUT4
C0108/1
C0109/2
C439/1 AOUT2
X10
A4
A3
A2
A1
X5
Appendix
9300BA0998
11-11
Appendix
11.2.5
Digital frequency cascade - slave

Tip!
The following codes are contained in the menu: Short Setup / DF slave cas of the

C0173
C0086
xxx
xxx


C0022
xxxA
Determine Imax

C0005
7000
Select digital frequency cascade - slave

C0011
C0032
C0033
C0425
C0473/1
C0533
xxx rpm
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx

Adapt encoder constant to the master
Numerator of the stretch factor
Denominator of the stretch factor
C0070
C0071
C0254
xxx
xxx
xxx
Vp n controller
Tn n-controller
Save parameters
C0003
11-12
9300BA0998
xxx
Save all parameters
FIG 12-6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
28
X5
QSP
CINH
C0472/3
OR1
*-1
ANEG
X7
C0897
C0896
C0891
C0898
FIXED1
FIXED0%
FIXED100%
C0895
C0894
FIXED0%
C0472/6
C0901
C0890
C0902
C0899
FIXED0
FIXED0
C0892
C0893
C0900
TRIP-SET
TRIP-RESET
DIGIN1
QSP
C0473/3
C0538/1
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM
C0906/5
C0906/6
C0907/1
C0420
C0490
C0495
C0025
C0051
Act. speed
C0906/7
MCTRL-M-ADD
MCTRL-N2-LIM
MCTRL-PHI-ON
MCTRL-PHI-LIM
C0908
C0254
C0011
Phase controller
MCTRL-PHI-SET
C0906/1
100%
C0906/8
C0907/4
C0907/2
C0906/3
C0906/4
C0907/3
QSP decel. ramp
MCTRL-N-SET
C0105
MCTRL-I-SET
MCTRL-I-LOAD
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM
Set phase
C0530
*
C0529
C0909
C0497
+
+
+
-
Speed
controller
C0534
C0072
C0070
C0071
+
+
Speed
limitation
C0042
C0528/2
+
+
C0253
-
Act. phase
C0528/1
DFSET-POUT
DFSET-ACK
DFSET
DFSET-PSET
DFSET-NOUT
Phase offset
C0252
CTRL
Phase trimming
C0535
C0531
Phase trimming=f(n)
C0536/3
C0538/2
C0538/3
2
1
2
1
C0532
a
a
* b
b
C0033
C0536/2
C0537
DCTRL-QSP
DFSET-A-TRIM
X5
E5
X5
E4
Speed
trimming
a
a
* b
b
C0533
DFSET-RESET
DFSET-SET
C0539
DFSET-IN
C0536/1
DFSET-VP-DIV
DFSET-RAT-DIV
DFSET-N-TRIM
X9/6,7
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-QSP
C0523
C0526
C0527
C0520
C0522
C0521
C0032
C0524
C0525
C0473/1
C0472/5
FIXED0%
RESOLVER
C0443
DCTRL -X5/28
DIGIN-CINH
C0425
DFIN
DIGIN1
C0114/1...5 DIGIN2
DIGIN3
0
DIGIN4
1
1
DIGIN5
DIGIN
FIXED0
X9
FIXED0
DFSET-0-PULSE
CONST
C0086
Torque
limitation
C0922
C0923
C0920
C0921
C0924
C0925
CTRL
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL
C0928
C0929
REF-PHI-IN
C0927/1
REF-N-IN
REF-ON
C0927/2
C0927/3
REF-MARK
C0926/1
REF-POS-LOAD
REF-ACTPOS-IN
MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-DCVOLT
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-MMAX
C0018
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
MCTRL-PHI-ANA
C0006
C0022
C0075
C0076
C0077
C0078
C0081
C0084
C0085
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
C0091
VECT-CTRL PWM
C0056
C0050
MCTRL-NSET2
Current controller
C0474/1
C0926/3
C0926/4
C0933
C0932
C0930
C0931
C0934
C0935
C0936
C0680
C0681
C0683/1
CMP1
C0017
REF-PSET
REF-N-SET
REF-OK
REF-BUSY
REF
TRIP
RDY
NACT=0
FIXED0
FIXED0%
X8
X9
C0547
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
DFOUT-DF-IN
C0117/1
C0117/2
C0117/3
C0117/4
C0545
CTRL
C0030
C0540
C434/1
C0444/1
C0444/2
C0444/3
C0444/4
DIGOUT1
DIGOUT2
DIGOUT3
DIGOUT4
C0109/1
DFOUT
DIGOUT
62
X6
C0118/1...4
63
X6
2
3
4
5
C0540
DFOUT-OUT
AOUT1
AOUT2
C0108/1
C0109/2
C0108/2
C439/1
C0548
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
X5 E5
C0544
C0541
C0542
A4
A3
A2
A1
X5
X10
Appendix
9300BA0998
11-13
FIG 12-7
11-14
9300BA0998
Connection diagram of configuration digital frequency
P ro c e s s c o n tro l
P L C
- =
V p u ll- o ff
R F R
2 8
X 7
E 5
+ 2 4 V
e x te rn a l
5 9
G e a rb o x
T R IP
A 1
A 4
M m a x
3 9
9 3 0 0 M a s te r
T R IP -R e s e t
R ig h t
Q S P
E 1
i= 1 9 .4
v = 5 0 m /m in
P u ll-o ff u n it (m a s te r d r iv e )
n s e t= 0
A 2
X 1 0
S tre tc h >
S tre tc h <
+ 2 4 V e x te rn a l
D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y
E 3
E 4
R F R
2 8
X 7
R ig h t
Q S P
E 1
A 1
T R IP
+ 2 4 V
e x te rn a l
5 9
A 4
M m a x
3 9
9 3 0 0 S la v e
T R IP -R e s e t
E 5
G e a rb o x
S tre tc h fa c to r
X 9
i= 5 .3
n s e t= 0
A 2
X 1 0
S tre tc h >
S tre tc h <
+ 2 4 V e x te rn a l
D ig ita l fr e q u e n c y
v = 8 0 m /m in
S tr e tc h u n it 1
E 3
E 4
R F R
2 8
E 5
5 9
A 1
T R IP
A 4
M m a x
3 9
9 3 0 0 S la v e
+ 2 4 V
e x te rn a l
X 7
T R IP -R e s e t
R ig h t
Q S P
E 1
G e a rb o x
S tre tc h fa c to r
X 9
i= 5 .3
n s e t= 0
A 2
X 1 0
v = 1 1 0 m /m in
S tr e tc h u n it 2
Appendix
Appendix
11.3
Code table
How to read the code table:
Column
Code
Abbreviation
C0039
1
2
14
15
[C0005]
Meaning
Code C0039
Subcode 1 of code C0039

Parameter value of the code can only be modified when controller is inhibited
LCD display of the operating module
Factory setting of the code
The row Important contains further information
99 Minimum value
{smallest step/unit}
maximum value
Meaning of the code
Additional, important explanation of the code
LCD
Lenze
Selection
Info
IMPORTANT
Code
*
1
-
LCD
C0002 Par load
C0003 Par save
C0004 Op-display
{1 %}
Possible settings
Lenze
0
56
Selection
0
Load default
1
Load PS1
2
Load PS2
3
Load PS3
4
Load PS4
11
Load ext PS1
12
Load ext PS2
13
Load ext PS3
14
Load ext PS4
20
ext -> EEPROM
0
1
2
3
4
11
Ready
Save PS1
Save PS2
Save PS3
Save PS4
Save extern
All available codes
IMPORTANT
Info
Load factory setting into RAM Load parameter set
Load parameter set x into the - Parameter set1 is
RAM and activate
loaded automatically
after every mains
connection.
Load parameter set x from the
operating module into the
RAM and activate
Transmit all parameter sets
from the operating module to
the controller and store
non-volatile
Saving completed
Save current parameter set x
non-volatile
Save parameter set
Save all parameter sets to the

operating module
Operating display
Operating module shows

selected code in the
operating level if no other
status indications of
C0183 are active.
9300BA0998
11-15
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0005] Signal CFG
11-16
9300BA0998
Possible settings
Lenze
1000
Selection
0000
1
2
2
20
21
100
Common
CFG:86xx -1CFG:86xx -2CFG:86xx -11CFG:922x -20CFG:922x -21CFG:empty
1000
1001
1003
1005
1010
1011
1013
1015
1100
1101
1103
1105
1110
1111
1113
1115
4000
4001
4003
4005
4010
4011
4013
4015
5000
5001
5003
5005
5010
5011
5013
5015
5900
5901
5903
5905
5910
5911
5913
5915
Speed mode
Speed 1
Speed 3
Speed 5
Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 13
Speed 15
Speed 100
Speed 101
Speed 103
Speed 105
Speed 110
Speed 111
Speed 113
Speed 115
Torque mode
Torque 1
Torque 3
Torque 5
Torque 10
Torque 11
Torque 13
Torque 15
DF mst
DF mst 1
DF mst 3
DF mst 5
DF mst 10
DF mst 11
DF mst 13
DF mst 15
DF mst 900
DF mst 901
DF mst 903
DF mst 905
DF mst 910
DF mst 911
DF mst 913
DF mst 915
IMPORTANT
Info
Signal configuration
(predefined basic
configurations)
Modified base configuration
compatible to frequency
inverter 86xx:
C005 = -1-/-2-/-11compatible to servo controller
922x: C005 = -20-/-21All internal connections are
removed
Speed control
Torque control with speed

limitation
Master for digital frequency

coupling
The digit indicates the

predefined controller
control
- xxx1:
RS232, RS485 or
fiber-optics
- xxx3:
- xxx5:
Systembus (CAN)
The last digit but one
indicates the predefined
voltage source for the
control terminals
- xx0x:
external supply voltage
- xx1x:
internal voltage supply
via X5/A1
The last digit but two
indicates additional
functions
- x1xx:
Brake control
- x9xx:
q
in case of quick
stop the
complete
l t connection
ti off
drives is
phase-controlled to zero
speed
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C0006] Op mode
IMPORTANT
Selection
6000 DF slv bus
6001 DF slv bus 1
6003 DF slv bus 3
6005 DF slv bus 5
6010 DF slv bus 10
6011 DF slv bus 11
6013 DF slv bus 13
6015 DF slv bus 15
7000 DF slv cas
7001 DF slv cas 1
7003 DF slv cas 3
7005 DF slv cas 5
7010 DF slv cas 10
7011 DF slv cas 11
7013 DF slv cas 13
7015 DF slv cas 15
*
1
SSC norm Y
Servo async Y
Servo PM-SM Y
11
SSC norm
22
Servo async
{1}
Info
Slave to digital frequency bus
Slave to digital frequency

cascade
Operating mode of the motor

control
sensorless control for motors
in star connection
Servo control asynchronous
motors in star connection
Servo control synchronous
motors in star connection
sensorless control for motors
in delta connection
Servo control asynchronous
motors in delta connection
99 Device address
* depending on C0086
- Change of C0086 resets
value to the assigned
factory setting
- Change
Ch
off C0006 sets
t
C0086 = 0!
C0009 LECOM address
C0011 Nmax
3000
500
C0012 Tir (acc)
0,000
0,000
{0,001 s} 999,900 Acceleration time Tir for the

main setpoint NSET
Bus device number when

operated via interface
- 10, 20, ..., 90 reserved
for broadbast to device
groups for RS232,
RS485, fibre optics.
Reference value for the
absolute and relative
setpoint selection for the
acceleration and
deceleration times.
- For parameterization via
interface:
Large changes in one
step should only be
made when the
controller is inhibited.
Related to the speed
change 0nmax.
C0013 Tif (dec)
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s} 999.900 Deceleration time Tif for the

main setpoint NSET

change 0nmax.
C0017 FCODE (Qmin)
50
-16000
C0018 fchop
{1 rpm}
{1 rpm}
16/8 kHz sin
16000 Maximum speed
16000 Switching threshold nact < nx
n act < C0017 activates

the comparator output
CMP1-OUT
Optimum noise reduction with Chopping frequency
automatic change-over to 8
kHz
9300BA0998
11-17
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
16 kHz sin
Info
Operation with optimum
power
Operation with optimum noise
reduction
16000 Threshold when nact = 0 is
recognized.
C0019 Thresh nact= 0
{1 rpm}
C0021 Slipcomp
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
C0022 Imax current
{0.01 A}
1.50 IN Imaxlimit
{0.01 A}
2.00 IN Imaxlimit for 9321 to 9324
[C0025] Feedback type
C0026
1
2
C0027
1
2
C0030
11-18
IMPORTANT
Selection
1
8 kHz sin
20.00 Slip compensation
- Input of the encoder

Selection of the feedback
specified on the
system
l t off the
th LLenze
C0420, C0490 or C0495 was nameplate
motor:
changed subsequently
- C0025 automatically
Control without feedback
changes C0420,
system (sensorless control,
C0490, C0495
SSC)
The resolver is designated
with RSxxxxxxxx.
Incremental encoder with TTL
level
10
0
COMMON
no feedback
10
RSx (Resolver)
110
111
112
113
210
211
212
213
310
IT-512-5V
IT-1024-5V
IT-2048-5V
IT-4096-5V
IS-512-5V
IS-1024-5V
IS-2048-5V
IS-4096-5V
AS-512-8V
410
AM-512-8V
{0.01 %}
Sine-cosine encoder
Stegmann single turn

sine-cosine encoder with
RS485 interface
Fa. Stegmann
Stegmann multi-turn
Sine cosine encoder with
RS485 interface
Freely assignable code for
199.99 relative analog signals
FCODE (offset)
FCODE (offset)
0.00
0.00
FCODE (gain)
FCODE (gain)
DFOUT const
100.00 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99

100.00
3
0
256 inc/rev
1
512 inc/rev
2
1024 inc/rev
3
2048 inc/rev
4
4096 inc/rev
5
8192 inc/rev
6
16384 inc/rev
9300BA0998
-199.99
active only in sensorless

control below the value of
C0291
factory setting
(1.5*Imotor)
- for RSP change-over
change over to
Imax > 1.5 Ir possible for
types 9321 to 9324

relative analog signals
Constant for the digital
frequency output in
increments per revolution
Used for:
Offset for terminal X6/1,2
Offset for terminal X6/3,4
Used for:
Gain X6/1,2
Gain X6/3,4
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
C0032 FCODE Gearbox
Lenze
1
Selection
-32767
{1}
C0033 Gearbox denom
{1}
C0034 Mst current
C0037
C0039
1
2
3
4
5
...
14
15
C0040
Set-value rpm
JOG set-value
JOG set-value
JOG set-value
JOG set-value
JOG set-value
...
JOG set-value
JOG set-value
Ctrl enable
100.0
75.00
50.00
25.00
0.00
...
0.00
0.00
1
Info
32767 Freely assignable code
Used for:
32767 Gearbox factor (denominator)

for DFSET
0
-10 V ... + 10 V
Selection: Master
voltage/master current for
1
+ 4 mA ... + 20 mA
set-value input
2
-20 mA ... + 20 mA
-16000
{1 rpm}
16000 Setpoint input in rpm
Fixed speeds (JOG set-values)
-199.99
{0.01 }
199.99 can be selected for NSET
using digital inputs.
0
1
Ctrl inhibit
Ctrl enable
Controller inhibit
- write:
- controls the code

- read:
C0042 DIS: QSP
Quick stop status

reset current trip
Active trip
Active JOG set-value
Reset of an active trip:

- Set C0043 = 0
display only
C0046 DIS: N
C0049 DIS: NADD
C0050 MCTRL-NSET2
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
...
15
-199.99
-199.99
-100.00
JOG 15
{0.01 %}
{0.01 %}
{0.01 %}
C0051
C0052
C0053
C0054
C0056
-30000
0
0
0.0
-100.00
{1 rpm}
{1 V}
{1 V}
{0.1 A}
{0.01 %}
C0057 Max Torque
0.0
{0.1 Nm}
500.0 Maximum possible torque of

the drive configuration
C0058 Rotor diff
-180.0
{0.1 E}
179.9 Zero phase of the rotor for

synchronous motors (C0095)
C0059 Mot pole no.

C0060 Rotor pos
1
0
{1}
{1}
C0061 Heatsink temp

C0063 Mot temp
0
0
{1 C}
{1 C}
C0043 Trip reset

C0045 DIS: act JOG
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-Umot
UG-VOLTAGE
IMot
MCTRL-MSET2
QSP inactive
QSP active
no/trip reset
trip active
Nset active
JOG 1
JOG 2
- reads the controller

status
display only
199.99 Main setpoint

199.99 Additional setpoint
100.00 n set at the speed controller
input
display only
display only
display only
30000
800
900
500.0
100.00
display only
display only
display only
display only
display only
Actual speed
Actual motor voltage
DC bus voltage
Actual motor current
Torque setpoint (output of the
speed controller)
display only
- depending on C0022,
C0086
display only
50 Pole pair number of the motor display only

2047 current rotor position
display only
- 1 rev. = 2048 inc
100 Heatsink temperature
display only
200 Motor temperature
display only
9300BA0998
11-19
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0064 Utilization
C0067 Act trip
Selection
0
{1 %}
see selection list 10

All fault indications
0.0
{0.5}
C0070 Vp speed-CTRL
C0071 Tn speed-CTRL
1.0
{0.5 ms}
600.0 T nn speed controller
> 512 ms
switched off
C0072 Td speed-CTRL
C0075 Vp curr-CTRL
0.0
*
0.0
0.00
{0.1 ms}
{0.01}
C0076 Tn curr-CTRL
0.5
2000 ms
{0.1 ms} 1999.0 T ni current controller

switched off
C0077 Vp field-CTRL
C0078 Tn field-CTRL
0.25
15.0
[C0081] Mot power
0.00
{0.01}
1.0
{0.5 ms}
8000 msswitched off
0.01
{0.01 kW}
[C0084] Mot Rs
0.00
{0.01 }
[C0085] Mot Ls
0.00
{0.01}
[C0086] Mot type
11-20
IMPORTANT
Info
150 Controller load I x t during the display only
last 180 s
- C0064 > 100 %
releases Trip OC5
- Trip reset is possible
only if C0064 < 95 %
Momentary fault indication
display only
9300BA0998
COMMON
255.0 V pn speed controller
32.0 T dn speed controller

15.99 V pi current controller
default setting
default setting
default setting
default setting
15.99 V pF field controller

7999.0 T nF field controller
500.00 Rated motor power acc. to
nameplate
default setting
- Change of C0081 sets
C0086 = 0
100.00 Stator resistance of the motor * depending on C0086
required for C0006 = 1
default setting
C0086 = 0
200.00 Stray inductance of the motor * depending on C0086
required for C0006 = 1
default setting
C0086 = 0
Selection motor type
* depending on the
controller
C0006, C0022, C0070,
C0071, C0081, C0084,
C0085, C0087, C0088,
C0089, C0090, C0091
to the assigned default
setting
no Lenze motor
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
Selection
10
DSKA56-140
11
DFKA71-120
12
DSKA71-140
13
DFKA80-60
14
DSKA80-70
15
DFKA80-120
16
DSKA80-140
17
DFKA90-60
18
DSKA90-80
19
DFKA90-120
20
DSKA90-140
21
DFKA100-60
22
DSKA100-80
23
DFKA100-120
24
DSKA100-140
25
DFKA112-60
26
DSKA112-85
27
DFKA112-120
28
DSKA112-140
30
DFQA100-50
31
DFQA100-100
32
DFQA112-28
33
DFQA112-58
34
DFQA132-20
35
DFQA132-42
40
DFQA112-50
41
DFQA112-100
42
DFQA132-36
43
DFQA132-76
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
DSVA56-140
DFVA71-120
DSVA71-140
DFVA80-60
DSVA80-70
DFVA80-120
DSVA80-140
DFVA90-60
DSVA90-80
DFVA90-120
DSVA90-140
DFVA100-60
DSVA100-80
DFVA100-120
DSVA100-140
DFVA112-60
DSVA112-85
DFVA112-120
DSVA112-140
IMPORTANT
Info
MDSKAXX056-22, fN : 140Hz
MDFKAXX071-22, fN : 120Hz
MDSKAXX090-22, fN :
140Hz
MDFQAXX100-50, fN : 50Hz
MDFQAXX100-100, fN :
100Hz
MDFQAXX112-100, fN :
100Hz
DSVAXX056-22, fN : 140Hz
DFVAXX071-22, fN : 120Hz
New generation of Lenze

asynchronous servo
motors
integrated temperature
monitoring via resolver or
encoder cable
- The temperature
monitoring via resolver
or encoder cable is
activated automatically,
i.e.:
C0583 = 0
C0584 = 2
C0594 = 0
Lenze asynchronous servo

motors
without integrated
temperature monitoring
- The temperature
or encoder cable is
deactivated
automatically, i.e.:
C0583 = 3
C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
9300BA0998
11-21
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
11-22
9300BA0998
Selection
108
DSKS36-13-200
109
DSKS36-23-200
110
DSKS56-23-150
111
DSKS56-33-150
112
DSKS71-13-150
113
DFKS71-13-150
114
DSKS71-23-150
115
DFKS71-23-150
116
DSKS71-33-150
117
DFKS71-33-150
160
DSKS56-23-190
161
DSKS56-33-200
162
DFKS71-03-170
163
DSKS71-03-165
164
DSKS71-13-185
165
DFKS71-13-180
166
DSKS71-33-180
167
DFKS71-33-175
IMPORTANT
Info
MDSKSXX036-13, fN : 200Hz
MDFKSXX071-13, fN : 150Hz
MDSKSXX56-23-190,fN
:190Hz
MDSKSXX56-33-200,fN
:200Hz
MDFKSXX71-03-170,fN
:170Hz
MDSKSXX71-03-165,fN
:165Hz
MDSKSXX71-13-185,fN
:185Hz
MDFKSXX71-13-180,fN
:180Hz
MDSKSXX71-33-180,fN
:180Hz
MDFKSXX71-33-175,fN
:175Hz
New generation of Lenze

synchronous servo motors
integrated temperature
monitoring via resolver or
encoder cable
- The temperature
or encoder cable is
activated automatically,
i.e.:
C0583 = 0
C0584 = 2
C0594 = 0
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
IMPORTANT
Selection
210
DXRA071-12-50
211
DXRA071-22-50
212
DXRA080-12-50
214
DXRA090-12-50
215
DXRA090-32-50
216
DXRA100-22-50
217
DXRA100-32-50
218
DXRA112-12-50
219
DXRA132-12-50
220
DXRA132-22-50
221
DXRA160-12-50
222
DXRA160-22-50
223
DXRA180-12-50
224
DXRA180-22-50
Info
DXRAXX071-12, fd : 50Hz
225
226
227
228
229
250
251
252
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
30kW-ASM-50
37kW-ASM-50
45kW-ASM-50
55kW-ASM-50
75kW-ASM-50
DXRA071-12-87
DXRA071-22-87
DXRA080-12-87
DXRA090-12-87
DXRA090-32-87
DXRA100-22-87
DXRA100-32-87
DXRA112-12-87
DXRA132-12-87
DXRA132-22-87
DXRA160-12-87
DXRA160-22-87
DXRA180-12-87
DXRA180-22-87
30kW-ASM-87
37kW-ASM-87
45kW-ASM-87
55kW-ASM-87
75kW-ASM-87
{1 rpm}
16000 Rated motor speed
[C0087] Mot speed
265
266
267
268
269
300
[C0088] Mot current
0.5
{0.1 A}
500.0 Rated motor current
Lenze inverter motor in

star connection
- The temperature
or encoder cable is
deactivated
C0583 = 3
C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
Lenze inverter motor in

delta connection
- The temperature
or encoder cable is
deactivated
C0583 = 3
C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
default setting
C0086 = 0
default setting
C0086 = 0
9300BA0998
11-23
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
[C0089] Mot frequency
Lenze
*
Selection
10
{1 Hz}
Info
1000 Rated motor frequency
[C0090] Mot voltage
50
{1 V}
500 Rated motor voltage
[C0091] Mot cos phi
0.50
{0.01}
1.00 Motor cos
C0093 Drive ident
Controller identification
0
1
93xx
C0094 Password
[C0095] Rotor pos adj
0
0
0
0
1
[C0096] Password
C0099
C0101
1
2
...
15
C0103
1
2
...
15
C0105
C0108
1
2
C0109
1
2
11-24
1
2
3
x.xx
S/W version
invalid
none
93xx
Type Lenze servo inverter

9999 Password
inactive
Rotor position adjustment of a
synchronous motor
active
C0058 displays the zero
angle of the rotor
no password protec- Extended password protection
tion
Read protection
Write protection
Read/Write protection
Software version
Additional acceleration times
{0.001 s} 999.900 Tir for the main setpoint NSET
add Tir
add Tir
...
add Tir
0.000
0.000
...
0.000
0.000
add Tif
add Tif
...
add Tif
QSP Tif
0.000
0.000
...
0.000
0.000
0.000
FCODE (gain)
FCODE (gain)
100.00 -199.99
100.00
{0.01 %}

FCODE (offset)
FCODE (offset)
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %}

9300BA0998
0.000
-199.99
default setting
C0086 = 0
default setting
C0086 = 0
default setting
C0086 = 0
displayy onlyy
C0095 = 1 starts position

adjustment
display only
change 0nmax.
Additional decleration times

{0.001 s} 999.900 Tif for the main setpoint NSET change 0nmax.
{0.001 s} 999.900 Deceleration time for quick

stop (QSP)

change 0nmax.
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
CFG: FDO
CFG: FDO
...
CFG: FDO
CFG: FDO
CFG: DIGOUT
CFG: DIGOUT
CFG: DIGOUT
CFG: DIGOUT
1000
1000
...
1000
1000
*
15000
10650
500
5003
DIGOUT pol
DIGOUT pol
DIGOUT pol
DIGOUT pol
OH7 limit
1
1
0
0
150
0
1
45
{1 EC}
C0122 OH4 limit
85
45
{1 EC}
C0125 Baud rate
C0126 MONIT CE0
0
1
2
3
4
0
2
3
C0114
1
2
3
4
5
[C0116]
1
2
...
31
32
[C0117]
1
2
3
4
C0118
1
2
3
4
C0121
HIGH active
LOW active

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
...
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
DCTRL-TRIP
CMP1-OUT
DCTRL-RDY
MCTRL-MMAX
High active
Low active
9600 baud
4800 baud
2400 baud
1200 baud
19200 baud
Trip
Warning
Off
C0130 DIS: act Ti
C0134 RFG charac
C0135 Control word
C0141 FCODE (setval)
0.00
0
1
2
...
14
15
0
1
0
-199.99
C12/C13
Ti 1
Ti 2
Ti 14
Ti 15
linear
S-shaped
{1}
{0.01 %}
Info
Terminal polarity
X5/E1
X5/E2
X5/E3
X5/E4
X5/E5
Signal configuration FDO
FDO 0
FDO 1
...
FDO 30
FDO 31
Signal configuration DIGOUT
X5/A1
X5/A2
X5/A3
X5/A4
Terminal polarity DIGOUT
X5/A1
X5/A2
X5/A3
X5/A4
150 Temperature threshold early
warning motor temperature
(OH7 fault)
85 Temperature threshold
warning heat sink
temperature (fault OH4)
LECOM baud rate for 2102
module
Free digital outputs can

only be evaluated when
networked with
automation interfaces.
Configuration communication
error monitoring with
automation interface CE0
active Titimes of NSET
C0012/C0013 active
T ir1/Tif1 active
T ir2/Tif2 active
...
T ir14/Tif14 active
T ir15/Tif15 active
linear
S-shaped
65535 Control word when networked
with automation interfaces
199.99 Freely assignable code for

relative analog signals
- displayy onlyy
Ramp characteristic for

setpoint
Decimal control word
- Device evaluates
information 16 bit,
binary coded
used as main setpoint in
the configurationc C0005
= xxx1
9300BA0998
11-25
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0142 Start options
Possible settings
Lenze
1
0
1
Info
Start options
Start lock
Auto start
C0151 DIS: FDO (DW)
output signals configures with

C0116
C0155 Status word 2
CFG: STAT.B0
CFG: STAT.B2
CFG: STAT.B3
CFG: STAT.B4
CFG: STAT.B5
CFG: STAT.B14
CFG: STAT.B15
DIS: STAT.B0
DIS: STAT.B2
DIS: STAT.B3
DIS: STAT.B4
DIS: STAT.B5
DIS: STAT.B14
DIS: STAT.B15
Act trip
C0167 Reset failmem

C0168
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2000
5002
5003
5050
10650
505
500
Fail no. act

Fail no. old1
Fail no. old2
Fail no. old3
Fail no. old4
Fail no. old5
Fail no. old6
Fail no. old7
9300BA0998
{1}
0 = Start protection
1 = automatic start
C0150 Status word
[C0156]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C0157
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C0161
11-26
IMPORTANT
Selection
{1}

PAR*1
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MMAX
NSET-RFG I= O
CMP1-OUT
DCTRL-CW/CCW
DCTRL-RDY
0

(see chapter 9.3)
0
No reset
1
Reset
(ihe chapter 9.3)
65535 Status word when networked

with automation interfaces
Hexadecimal signal
assignment of the free digital
outputs.
65535 Status word 2
is executed:
- after mains connection
- after message (t > 0.5s)
- after trip
Decimal status word
- display only
- binary interpretation
indicates the bit states
- display only
Extended decimal status
word
- display only
Configuration of the free bits

of the status word
Status of the free bits of the

1 status word
display only
momentary fault indications

(as under C0168/1)
display only
Clears the history buffer

Faults occurred
now active
last
last but one
last but two
last but three
last but four
last but five
last bus six
History buffer
- List of fault occurred
- display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
IMPORTANT
C0178 Op timer
Selection
Info
corresponding mains switch-on Occurrence of the faults
time
now active
last
last but one
last but two
last but three
last but four
last but five
last but six
Fault frequency
now active
last
last but one
last but two
last but three
last but four
last but five
last but six
0
{10 V}
100 Threshold to activate the
brake torque reduction before
OU fault
Adaptation of DC bus voltage
thresholds
0
Mains< 400V+ -B
Operation on mains < 400 V
with or without brake unit
1
Mains= 400V+ -B
Operation on 400 V mains
2
Mains= 460V+ -B
3
Mains= 480V-B
without brake unit
4
Mains= 480V+ B
with brake unit
0
{1 s}4294967295 Elapsed operating time meter
C0179 Mains timer
C0169
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C0170
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[C0172]
Failtime act
Failtime old1
Failtime old2
Failtime old3
Failtime old4
Failtime old5
Failtime old6
Failtime old7
Counter act
Counter old1
Counter old2
Counter old3
Counter old4
Counter old5
Counter old6
Counter old7
0V reduce
[C0173] UG limit
C0182 Ti S-shaped
10
20.00
0.01 s
{1 s}4294967295 Mains switch-on time meter

{0.01 s}
History buffer
- List of times when the
faults have occurred
under C0168
- related to C0179
- display only
History buffer
- List of how often the
faults have occurred
consecutively under
C0168
- display only
- check during
commissioningg and
adapt,
d t if necessary
- all drive components in
DC bus connections
must have the same
thresholds
Time when the controller

was enabled
Time when the mains was
switched on
50.00 s T i time of the S-shaped ramp Determines the S-shape

generator for NSET
- small valuesA
small S rounding
- high valuesA
large S rounding
9300BA0998
11-27
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
IMPORTANT
Selection
Info
- displayy onlyy
Drive diagnostics
- indicates fault or status
No fault
information
Initialization phase
- if several items or fault
TRIP active
or status information are
Emergency stop was released
to be shown, the
Message active
information with the
smallest number is
Operation inhibited
displayed
C0183 Diagnostics
g
OK
Init
Trip
RFG P-OFF
IMP Message
Power off
BSP C135
BSP AIF
BSP CAN
CINH term 28
CINH int 1
CINH int 2
CINH C135/STP
CINH AIF
CINH CAN
Lock mode
IMP
151
152
153
154
250
0
1
2
3
4
5
QSP ext term

QSP C135/STP
QSP AIF
QSP CAN
Warning
OUT = C46
C46 + C49
C46 - C49
C46 * C49
C46 / C49
C46/(100 - C49)
Controller inhibited via X5/28

DCTRL-CINH1
DCTRL-CINH2
STOP key of 9371BB
Controller inhibited via AIF
Controller inhibited via CAN
Restart protection active
Power outputs with high
resistance
QSP via MCTRL-QSP
QSP via STOP key
QSP via AIF
QSP via CAN
Warning active
Arithmetic block in the
function block NSET
C0190 NSET arit
C0195 BRK1 T act
99.9
0.0
{0.1 s}
99.9 s infinite
99.9 Brake engaging time
C0196 BRK T release
0.0
0.0
60.0 Brake disengaging time
C0200
C0201
C0203
C0204
C0206
C0207
C0208
C0209
11-28
0
101
102
103
104
105
111
112
113
121
122
123
124
125
126
141
142
S/W Id
S/W date
Komm.-No.
Serial-No.
Produkt date
DL info 1
DL info 2
DL info 3
9300BA0998
{0.1 s}
x / xxxx / xxxxx
0
{1}
Software identification
Software release date
Commission number
65535 Serial number
Production date
Download-Info 1
Download-Info 2
Download-Info 3
Connects main setpoint

C0046 and additional
setpoint C0049
Engaging time of the

mechanical holding brake
(see technical data of the
brake).
- after the time elapsed
under C0195, the status
mechanical brake
closed is reached
Disengaging time of the
mechanical holding brake
(see technical data of the
brake).
- After time has elapsed
under C0195, the status
mechanical brake
closed is reached
display only
display only
display only
display only
display only
display only
display only
display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
C0220 NSET Tir add
Lenze
0.000
Selection
Info
0.000
{0.001 s} 999.900 Acceleration time Tir of the
additional setpoint for NSET
C0221 NSET Tif add
0.000
0.000
C0222 PCTRL Vp
C0223 PCTRL Tn
1.0
400
C0224 PCTRL Kd
0.0
C0241 NSET RFG I = O
1.00
C0244 BRK M set
0.00
C0250 FCODE 1Bit

C0252 phase offset
-245760000{1 inc} 245760000 Phase offset for DFSET
C0253 Angle n-trim
-32767
C0254 Vp angle-CTRL
C0255 Threshold P03
0.40
0.0000
327680 10
0
C0260 MPOT1 high
100.00 -199.99
C0261 MPOT1 low
-100.0 -199.99
C0262 MPOT1 Tir
10.0
0.1
C0263 MPOT1 Tif
10.0
0.1
C0264 MPOT1 on/off
{0.001 s} 999.900 Deceleration time Tif of the

additional setpoint for NSET
0.1
{0.1}
500.0 Process controller gain Vp
20
{1 ms}
99999 Process controller integral
component Tn
99999 ms
switched off
0.0
{0.1}
5.0 Process controller differential
compconent Kd

change 0nmax.
change 0nmax.
0.00
{0.01 %}
100 % = nmax
100.00 Threshold ramp generator for

main setpoint
Input = output
-100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Holding torque of the DC
injection brake
100 % = value of C0057
0
1
2
3
4
5
{1 inc}
32767 Phase trimming for DFSET
Fixed phase offset for

digital frequency
configuration
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
speed-dependent phase
trimming
* depending on C0005,
C0025, C0490
- Change of C0005,
C0025, or C0490 resets
C0253 to the default
setting
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
- C0253 is reached at
15000 rpm
{0.0001} 3.9999 V p phase controller in MCTRL

{1 inc} 180000000 Contouring error limit
Contouring error limit for
fault P03
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
- Contouring error >
C0255 releases fault
P03
{0.01 %} 199.99 Upper limit of motor
mandatory
potentiometer
- C0260 > C0261
{0.01 %} 199.99 Lower limit of motor
mandatory
potentiometer
- C0261 < C0260
{0.1 s}
6000.0 Motor pot acceleration time Tir Related to change
0100 %
{0.1 s}
No function
Down to 0%
Down to C261
Jump 0%
Jump to C261
Up to C260
6000.0 Motor pot deceleration time

Tif
Related to change
0100 %
Deactivation function of motor - Function which is
executed when motor
pot
pott is
i deactivated
d ti t d via
i
no change
the input
Deceleration with Tif to 0%
MPOT1-INACTIVE.
Deceleration with Tif to C0261
Inhibit with Tif = 0 to 0%
Inhibit with Tif = 0 to C0261
Acceleration with Tir to C0260
9300BA0998
11-29
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0265 MPOT1 init
Possible settings
Lenze
0
0
Power off
1
C261
2
0%
[C0267]
1 CFG: UP
2 CFG: DOWN
[C0268] CFG: INACT
1000
1000
1000
C0269
1
2
3
C0291
DIS: UP
DIS: DOWN
DIS: INACTIVE
SSC override
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
Info
Initialization function of motor - Value which is
accepted duringg mains
pot
switching
it hi andd activated
ti t d
Value during mains failure
motor pot.
lower limit of C0261
0%
Configuration of the digital
inputs of motor pot MPOT1
Digital input acceleration
Digital input deceleration
Configuration of the motor pot
input MPOT1-INACTIVE
Input signals motor
potentiometer
display only
{1 rpm}
C0292 SSC Im set
0.00
0.00
{0.01 A}
C0293 SSC dynamic
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
C0294 Vp frq ctrl
0.0
{0.1}
99.9 Prpportional gain frequency

controller
C0295 Tn frq ctrl
{1 ms}
C0296 Dynamic Const

C0325 Vp2 adapt
100
1.0
0
0.1
{0.1}
{0.1}
20000 Adjustment time frequency

controller
32767 Dynamic constant
500.0 Process controller adaptation
gain (Vp2)
C0326 Vp3 adapt
1.0
0.1
{0.1}

gain (Vp3)
C0327 Set2 adapt
100.00 0.00
{0.01 %}

nset2
C0328 Set1 adapt
0.00
{0.01 %}

nset1
C0329 Adapt on/off
0.00
0
1
2
3
C0332 PCTRL Tir
11-30
IMPORTANT
Selection
9300BA0998
0.000
0.000
16000 Override frequency for the

transition from sensorless
control to controlled operation
500.00 Motor current setpoint
Set approx. 1.0 to 1.1
times rated motor current
for sensorless speed
control.
199.00 Dynamic constant
dynamic motor current
boost
Activate process controller

adaptation
no
no process controller
adaptation
Extern Vp
external via input
Set-value
Adaptation via setpoint
Ctrl diff
Adaptation via control difference
{0.001 s} 999.900 Process controller
acceleration time Tir
Set speed threshold of the

process controller
adaptation
mandatory
- C0327 > C0328
Set speed threshold of the
process controller
adaptation
mandatory
- C0328 < C0327
related to setpoint change

0100 %
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0333 PCTRL Tif
Possible settings
Lenze
0.000
C0336 DIS: act Vp
0.0
C0337 Bi/unipolar
C0338 ARIT1 funct
[C0339]
1
2
C0340
1
2
[C0350]
[C0351]
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CAN address
CAN baudrate
[C0352] CAN mst

C0353
1
2
3
C0354
1
2
3
4
5
6
C0355
1
2
3
4
5
6
C0356
1
2
3
4
1000
1000
IMPORTANT
Selection
Info
0.000
{0.001 s} 999.900 Process controller
deceleration time Tir
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
{0.1}
bipolar
unipolar
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 * IN2
IN1 / IN2
IN1/(100 - IN2)
500.0 Process controller momentary display only

Vp
Process controller range
bipolar/unipolar
Function arithmetic block
ARIT1

FIXED 0 %
FIXED 0 %
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
{1}
500 kbit/s
250 kbit/s
125 kbit/s
50 kbit/s
1000 kbit/s
Slave
Master
C350
C354
display only
63 CAN bus node address

CAN bus baud rate
Install CAN bus master

operation
Source for CAN bus IN/OUT
addresses
CAN addr sel1

CAN addr sel2
CAN addr sel3
0
0
0
0
1
IN1 addr2
OUT1 addr2
IN2 addr2
OUT2 addr2
IN3 addr2
OUT3 addr2
129
1
257
258
385
386
{1}
{1}
2047
{1 ms}
65000
CAN bus IN/OUT node

512 addresses
CAN bus identifier

CAN-IN1 Id
CAN-OUT1 Id
CAN-IN2 Id
CAN-OUT2 Id
CAN-IN3 Id
CAN-OUT3 Id
links inputs IN1 and IN2
Configuration arithmetic
blockARIT1
Input signals arithmetic block
ARIT1
1
0
related to setpoint change

0100 %
display only
CAN bus time settings

CAN boot up
CAN-OUT2 T
CAN-OUT3 T
CAN delay
3000
0
0
20
9300BA0998
11-31
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0357]
1
2
3
C0358
CE1monit time
CE2monit time
CE3monit time
Reset node
C0359 CAN state
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
3000
3000
3000
0
{1 ms}
0
1
no function
CAN reset
0
1
2
3
Operational
Pre-Operat
Warning
Bus off
C0361
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
{1}
{1 %}
Load OUT
Load IN
Load OUT1
Load OUT2
Load OUT3
Load POUT1
Load POUT2
Load IN1
Load IN2
Load IN3
Load PIN1
Load PIN2
C0363 Sync corr
0
1
[C0364] CFG:CAN activ

1000
C0365 DIS:CAN activ
11-32
0
Message OUT
Message IN
Message OUT1
Message OUT2
Message OUT3
Message POUT1
Message POUT2
Message IN1
Message IN2
Message IN3
Message PIN1
Message PIN2
C0362 Sync cycle
9300BA0998
Install CAN bus reset node

CAN bus status:
C0360
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Info
CAN bus monitoring time for
65000 INx
{1 ms}
1
0.8 ms
2
1.6 ms
3
2.4 ms
4
3.2 ms
5
4.0 ms
FIXED 0
0
Telegram counter
65535 (number of telegrams)
all sent
all received
sent to CAN-OUT1
sent to CAN-OUT2
sent to CAN-OUT3
sent to parameter channel1
received from CAN-IN1
received from parameter
channel1
channel2
100 CAN bus load
all sent
all received
sent to CAN-OUT1
sent to CAN-OUT2
sent to CAN-OUT3
channel1
channel2
30 Time between two sync
telegrams on the system bus
display only
display only
- for values
> 65535 the counting
restarts with 0
- display only
- To ensure a perfect
operation, the total bus

load (all connected
devices) should be less
than 80%
display only
Correction value for C0362
Activate process data

externally
1 Input signal CAN active
Change over from

pre-operation to operation
display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
C0366 Sync Response
Lenze
1
C0367 Sync Rx ID
C0368 Sync Tx ID
C0369 Sync Tx Time
128
128
0
Selection
0
no sync response
1
sync response
1
{1}
256
1
{1}
256
0
{1}
65000
IMPORTANT
Info
??? CAN
??? CAN
??? CAN
??? CAN
9300BA0998
11-33
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0400 DIS: OUT

[C0402] CFG: OFFSET
[C0403] CFG: GAIN
C0404
1
2
C0405
[C0407]
Possible settings
Info
199.99 Output of AIN1
Configuration offset of AIN1
-199.99
{0.01 %}
199.99 Output of AIN2

Configuration offset of AIN2
[C0420] Encoder const
512
256
{1 inc/rev}
[C0421] Encoder volt
5.00
5.00
{0.1V}
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
-32767
0
1
2
C0425 DFIN const
C0426 DIS: OUT

C0427 DFIN funktion
C0429 TP5 delay
[C0431] CFG: IN
[C0432] CFG: OFFSET
[C0433] CFG: GAIN
C0434
1
2
3
[C0436]
DIS: IN
DIS: OFFSET
DIS: GAIN
CFG: IN
Input signals of AIN2

{0.01 %}
display only
199.99
99999999 Correction of the resolver
error
8192 Encoder constant for
encoder input X8 in
increments per revolution
8.00 Set supply voltage for the
encoder used
for Lenze motors

- Read resolver error from
the nameplate
CAUTION:
incorrect input may
destroy the encoder
256 inc/rev
Constant for digital frequency
input in increments per
512 inc/rev
revolution
1024 inc/rev
2048 inc/rev
4096 inc/rev
8192 inc/rev
16384 inc/rev
{1 rpm}
32767 Output signal of DFIN
display only
0
2-phase
Type of the digital frequency
signal
A puls / B dir
0 = Quadrature
Puls A or B
1 = Pulse / Direction
2 = Pulse A / Pulse B
0
-32767
{1 inc}
32767 Dead time compensation for
the TP function of DFSET and
DFRFG
Configuration input of AOUT1
5001 MCTRL-NACT
Configuration offset of
AOUT1
19512 FCODE-109/1
Configuration gain of AOUT1
19510 FCODE-108/1
Input signals of AOUT1
display only
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
5002
9300BA0998
display only
Configuration gain of AIN2
C0409
1 DIS: OFFSET
2 DIS: GAIN
[C0416] Resolver adj
{1}
display only
199.99
-199.99
{1 %}
19503 FCODE-26/2
19505 FCODE-27/2
-199.99
display only
Configuration gain of AIN1

Input signals of AIN1
DIS: OFFSET
DIS: GAIN
DIS: OUT
CFG: OFFSET
[C0408] CFG: GAIN
11-34
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
-199.99 {0,01 %}
19502 FCODE-26/1
19504 FCODE-27/1

MCTRL-MSET2
Configuration input of AOUT2
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0437] CFG: OFFSET

[C0438] CFG: GAIN
C0439
1
2
3
[C0440]
Possible settings
Info
Configuration offset of
AOUT2
Configuration gain of AOUT2
Input signals of AOUT2
DIS: IN
DIS: OFFSET
DIS: GAIN
CFG: STATE-BUS
-199.99
1000
C0441 DIS: STATE-BUS

C0443 DIS: DIGIN-OUT
C0444
1
2
3
4
[C0450]
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
19513 FCODE-109/2
19511 FCODE-108/2
{0.01 %}
{1}
Configuration state bus

X5/ST
Monitoring signal State bus
255 Signals at X5/E1 to X5/E5
decimal value
Signals at X5/A1 to X5/A4

DIS: DIGOUT1
DIS: DIGOUT2
DIS: DIGOUT3
DIS: DIGOUT4
CFG: NX
1000
[C0451] CFG: ON
1000
[C0452] CFG: SIGN
1000
C0458
1 DIS: NX
2 DIS: SIGN
C0459 DIS: ON
C0464 Customer I/F
display only
199.99
display only
display only
- Binary interpretation
indicates terminal
signals
display only

FIXED 0 %
FIXED 0
FIXED 0 %
Configuration analog input of

BRK1
Configuration digital input of
BRK1
BRK1
Analog input signals of BRK1 display only
-199.99
0
1
{0.01 %}
original
changed
199.99
Digital input signal of BRK1
display only
Status of selected base

configuration
display only
- Reassignment of
terminals in a base
configuration from
C0005 does not change
C0005 and sets C0464
=1
- Adding or removing of
function blocks or
changing the signal flow
among the function
blocks in a base
configuration of C0005
sets C0005 = 0 and
C0464 = 1
9300BA0998
11-35
Appendix
Code
[C0465]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
...
19
...
22
...
25
...
28
...
31
...
41
42
...
49
50
C0466
LCD
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
FB list
...
FB list
FB list
CPU T remain
[C0469] Fct STP key
Possible settings
2
0
1
2
C0470
1
2
3
4
C0471
11-36
FCODE bit 0-7

FCODE bit8-15
FCODE bit 16-23
FCODE bit 24-31
FCODE 32 bit
9300BA0998
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
*
See selection list 5
200
0
50
0
0
55
0
0
10250
0
0
0
5650
0
0
5050
0
5700
0
10650
0
70
0
75
0
250
0
25000
20000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
inactive
CINH
QSP
Info
Processing sequence list of * depending on C0005
function blocks
Change of C0005 loads
assigned processing list
Contained in the program of
signal processing (sequence * Valid for C0005 =
in which the function blocks
1000
are processed)
- After changing the
signal flow adapt the
processing list in every
case.Otherwise, the
device may use wrong
signals!
- The function blocks
DIGIN, DIGOUT, AIF-IN,
CAN-IN, and MCTRL are
always processed and
do not have to be
entered in the list.
Residual process time for the

processing of function blocks
Function of the STOP key of
the operating module
Deactivated
Controller inhibit
Quick stop
255 digital signals
{1}
{1} 4294967296 Freely assignable code for

digital signals
display only
Function is activated when
ressing the STOP key.
pressing
The data words C0470

and C0471 are in parallel
and are identical
The data words C0470

and C0471 are in parallel
and are identical
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
C0472
1
2
3
...
19
20
C0473
1
2
3
...
9
10
C0474
1
2
3
4
5
FCODE analog
FCODE analog
FCODE analog
...
FCODE analog
FCODE analog
0.00
0.00
100.0
0
...
0.00
0.00
-199.99
{0.01 %}
Info
FCODE abs
FCODE abs
FCODE abs
...
FCODE abs
FCODE abs
1
1
0
...
0
0
-32767
{1}

32767 absolute analog signals
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
0
0
0
0
0
C0475
1 FCODE DF
2 FCODE DF
[C0490] Feedback pos
0
0
0

-2147483648 {1} 2147483648 phase signals
1 rev. = 65536 inc

16000 phase difference signals
1 rev. = 65536 inc
-16000
0
1
2
3
4
[C0495] Feedback n
C0497 Nact-filter
{1 rpm}
Resolver
Encoder TTL
Encoder sin
Absolut ST
Absolut MT
2.0
0
1
2
3
4
Resolver
Encoder TTL
Encoder sin
Absolut ST
Absolut MT
0.0
0 ms
{0.1 ms}
switched off
Feedback system for position

controller
Resolver at X7
Encoder TTL at X8
sin/cos encoder at X8
Absolute value encoder ST at
X8
Absolute value encoder MT
at X8
Feedback system for the
speed controller
Resolver at X7
Encoder TTL at X8
sin/cos encoder at X8
Absolute value encoder ST at
X8
Absolute value encoder MT
at X8
50.0 Time constant actual speed
- C0490 = 0, 1, 2 can be
mixed with C0495 = 0,

1, 2
- C0490 = 3, 4 also sets
C0495 to the same
value
- C0495 = 0, 1, 2 can be
mixed with C0490 = 0,

1, 2
- C0495 = 3, 4 also sets
C0490 to the same
value
9300BA0998
11-37
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0517
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
...
31
32
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
...
User menu
User menu
[C0520] CFG: IN
[C0521] CFG: VP-DIV
[C0522] CFG: RAT-DIV
[C0523] CFG: A-TRIM
[C0524] CFG: N-TRIM
[C0525] CFG: 0-PULSE
[C0526] CFG: RESET
[C0527] CFG: SET
Possible settings
Lenze Selection
0
{1}
199900
51.00 C0051/0 MCTRL-NACT
54.00 C0054/0 Imot
56.00 C0056/0 MCTRL-MSET2
46.00 C0046/0 DIS: N
49.00 C0049/0 DIS: NADD
183.0 C0183/0 Diagnostics
0
C0168/1 Fail no. act
168.0 C0086/0 Mot type
1
C0022/0 Imax current
86.00 C0005/0 Signal cfg
22.00 C0011/0 Nmax
5.00 C0012/0 Tir
11.00 C0013/0 Tif
12.00 C0105/0 QSP Tif
13.00 C0039/1 JOG setpoint
105.0 C0070/0 Vp speed CTRL
0
C0071/0 Tn speed CTRL
39.01 not assigned
70.00 not assigned
71.00 C0094/0 Password
0
C0003/0 Par save
0
94.00
3.00
1000 FIXEDPHI-0
1000 FIXED 0 %
1000 FIXED 0 %
1000 FIXED 0 %
1000 FIXED 0 %
1000 FIXED 0
1000 FIXED 0
1000 FIXED 0
C0528
1 DIS: 0-pulse A
numbers of the desired

codes are entered.
- The input is done in the
format xxx.yy
- xxx: Code number
- yy: Subcode for code
- It is not checked
whether the entered
code exists.
Configuration input of DFSET

Configuration gain factor
numerator of DFSET
Configuration gearbox factor
numerator of DFSET
Configuration phase
trimming of DFSET
Configuration speed
trimming of DFSET
Configuration one-time zero
pulse is activation of DFSET
Configuration reset
integrators of DFSET
Configuration set integrators
of DFSET
display only
C0529 Multip offset

C0530 DF evaluation
1
1
C0531 Act 0 div
9300BA0998
- Under the subcodes the
-2000000000{1 inc} 200000000 Phase difference between

0
two zero pulses
2 DIS: Offset
11-38
IMPORTANT
Info
User menu with up to 32
entries
Offset of C0523*C0529 +
C0252
-20000
{1}
20000 Offset multiplier
0
with g factor
Evaluation of the setpoint
Evaluation of the setpoint
integrator of DFSET
phase integrator of DFSET
1
without g factor
(with/without gearbox factor)
1
{1}
16384 Actual zero pulse divider of
DFSET
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
C0532 0-pulse/TP
Lenze Selection
1
1
0-pulse
2
Touch probe
C0533 Vp denom
C0534 0-pulse fct
C0535 Set 0 div

C0536
1
2
3
C0537
DIS: VP-DIV
DIS: RAT-DIV
DIS: A-TRIM
DIS: N-TRIM
C0538
1
2
3
C0539
C0540
DIS: 0-PULSE
DIS: RESET
DIS: SET
DIS: IN
Function
[C0541] CFG: AN-IN

5001
[C0542] CFG: DF-IN
1000
[C0544] CFG: SYN-RDY
1000
C0545 PH offset
C0546 Min inc/rev
C0547 DIS: AN-IN
C0548 DIS: SYN-RDY
C0549 DIS: DF-IN
0
1000
0
1
2
10
11
12
13
1
{1}
Info
Selection zero pulse of the
feedback system or touch
probe for DFSET
32767 Gain factor denominator of
DFSET
Zero pulse function of DFSET
Inactive
Continuous
Cont. switch
Once, fast way
Once, cw
Once, ccw
Once, 2*0-puls
{1}
16384 Set zero pulse divider of
DFSET
Absolute analog input signals display only
32767 of DFSET
-32767
{1}
-199.99
{0.01 %}
199.99 Relative analog input signal display only

of DFSET
Digital input signals of DFSET display only
-32767
{1 rpm}
0
Analog input
1
PH diff input
2
Res + int 0
display only
32767 Input signal of DFSET

Analog input
Phase difference input
Resolver simulation + zero
pulse
3
Res + ext 0
Resolver simulation without
zero pulse
4
OUT = DFIN
X9 is output on X10
5
OUT = encoder
X8 is output on X10
DFOUT
MCTRL-NACT
Configuration digital
frequency input of DFOUT
FIXEDPHI 0
Configuration
synchronization signal for
FIXED 0
the zero pulse of DFOUT
0
{1 inc}
65535 Phase offset of DFOUT
1
{1 inc} 214748364
7
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Relative analog input signal
of DFOUT
0
1 Digital input signal of DFOUT
-32767
{1 rpm}
32767 Absolute analog input signal
of DFOUT
X9 is inhibited if 0,, 1,, 2 or

3 was selected
l
d
The input signals get a

gain
1 rev. = 65535 inc

1 rev. = 65535 inc
display only
display only
display only
9300BA0998
11-39
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
C0560
1
2
3
4
5
...
14
15
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
...
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
100.0
0
75.00
50.00
25.00
0.00
...
0.00
0.00
[C0561] CFG: AIN

1000
[C0562]
1
2
3
4
C0563
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: AIN
C0564
1
2
3
4
[C0570]
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
[C0571] CFG: LOAD
1000
11-40
-199.99
Info
Fixed setpoints of FIXSET1
{0.01 %}

FIXED 0 %
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
-199.99 {0.01 %}

FIXED 0 %
FIXED 0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
C0572 DIS: IN
C0573 DIS: LOAD
C0577 Vp fld weak
3.0
0.00
C0578 Tn fld weak
10
C0581 MONIT EEr
C0582 MONIT OH4
C0583 MONIT OH3
2.0
{0.5 ms}
8000 msswitched off
0
Trip
1
Message
2
Warning
3
Off
2
Warning
3
Off
0
Trip
3
Off
C0584 MONIT OH7
2
3
Warning
Off
C0585 MONIT OH8
C0586 MONIT SD2
0
2
3
0
2
3
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
9300BA0998
{0.01 ms}
199.99

FIXSET1
Configuration digital inputs of
FIXSET1
199.99 Analog input signal of

FIXSET1
Digital input signals of
FIXSET1
display only
display only

S&H1
S&H1
199.99 Analog input signal of S&H1
Digital input signal of S&H1
15.99 Field weakening controller
gain Vp
8192.0 Field weakening controller
adjustment time Tn
display only
display only
Configuration monitoring EEr

(external fault)
Configuration monitoring
OH4 (heat sink temperature)
OH3 (motor temperature
fixed)
adjustable)
adjustable)
SD2 (resolver)
Temperature monitoring
via resolver input
Temperature monitoring
via PTC input
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0587 MONIT SD3
C0588 MONIT H10/H11
Possible settings
C0589 MONIT P03
C0590 MONIT P13
C0591 MONIT CE1
C0592 MONIT CE2
C0593 MONIT CE3
C0594 MONIT SD6
C0595 MONIT CE4
C0596 Nmax limit
5500
C0597 MONIT LP1
C0598 MONIT SD5
C0599 Limit LP 1
5.0
C0600 Function
[C0601]
1
2
C0602
1
2
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
3
0
Trip
2
Warning
3
Off
3
0
Trip
3
Off
1000
1000
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
{1 rpm}
0
2
3
0
2
3
1.0
Trip
Warning
Off
Trip
Warning
Off
{0.1}
0
1
2
3
4
5
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 * IN2
IN1 / IN2
IN1/(100 - IN2)
Info
SD3 (encoder at X9)
H10 and H11 (thermal
sensors in the controller)
Configuration monitoring P03
(contouring error)
Configuration monitoring P13
(phase error)
Configuration monitoring CE1
(CAN-IN1 fault)
(CAN-IN2 fault)
(CAN-IN3 fault)
SD6 (sensor motor
temperature)

(CAN bus off)
16000 Monitoring: Speed of the
machine
motor phase failure
master current at X5/1.2 <
2mA
10.0 Current limit for motor phase
failure monitoring
Function arithmetic block
links inputs IN1 and IN2
ARIT2

FIXED 0 %
FIXED 0 %
Configuration analog inputs

of ARIT2
analog input signals of ARIT2 display only
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
-199.99
{0.01 %}
199.99
9300BA0998
11-41
Appendix
Code
[C0610]
1
2
3
C0611
1
2
3
C0620
LCD
Possible settings
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXED 0 %
1000 FIXED 0 %
1000 FIXED 0 %
-199.99
{0.01 %}
1.00
-10.00
{0.01}
1.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
FIXED 0 %
-199.99 {0.01 %}
-199.99 {0.01 %}
1000
C0623 DIS: IN
C0630 Max limit
C0631 Min limit
[C0632] CFG: IN
C0633 DIS: IN
C0640 Delay T
100.0
0
-100.0 -199.99 {0.01 %}
1000 FIXED 0 %
-199.99 {0.01 %}
20.00 0.01
{0.01 s}
[C0641] CFG: IN
1000
DIS: IN
DT1-1 gain
Delay T
CFG: IN
C0653 Sensibility
C0654
C0655
C0656
[C0657]
DIS: IN
Numerator
Denominator
CFG: IN
1.00
1.00
1000
1
1
1
1000
C0658 DIS: IN
[C0661] CFG: IN
1000
C0662 DIS: IN
C0671 RFG1 Tir
C0672 RFG1 Tif
[C0673] CFG: IN
0.000
0.000
1000
11-42
Adds inputs IN1, IN2 and

IN3
analog input signals of ADD1 display only

DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DB1 gain
C0621 DB1 value

[C0622] CFG: IN
C0642
C0650
C0651
[C0652]
IMPORTANT
Info
of addition block ADD1
9300BA0998

FIXED 0 %
-199.99 {0.01 %}
-320.00
{0.01}
0.005
{0.01 s}
FIXED 0 %
1
15-bit
2
14-bit
3
13-bit
4
12-bit
5
11-bit
6
10-bit
7
9-bit
-199.99 {0.01 %}
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
FIXED 0 %
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99
10.00 Gain dead band component

DB1
100.00 Dead band of DB1
DB1
199.99 Analog input signal of DB1
199.99 Upper limit of limiter LIM1
display only
199.99 Lower limit of limiter LIM1

LIM1
199.99 Analog input signal of LIM1 display only
50.00 Time constant of the PT1-1
component
PT1-1
199.99 Analog input signal of PT1-1 display only
320.00 Gain of DT1-1 component
5.000 Time constant of DT1-1
DT1-1
Input sensitivity of DT1-1
199.99 Analog input signal of DT1-1 display only

32767 Numerator for CONV5
32767 Denominator for CONV5
CONV5
199.99 Analog input signal of

nur Anzeige
CONV5
Configuration analog input
absolute-value generator
FIXED 0 %
ABS1
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Analog input signal of ABS1 display only
0.000
{0.01 s} 999.900 Acceleration time Tir of ramp
generator RFG1
0.000
{0.01 s} 999.900 Deceleration time Tif of RFG1
RFG1
FIXED 0 %
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0674] CFG: SET

[C0675] CFG: LOAD
C0676
1
2
C0677
C0680
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXED 0 %
1000 FIXED 0
Info
Configuration set input of
RFG1
RFG1
Analog input signals of RFG1 display only
DIS: IN
DIS: SET
DIS: LOAD
Function
C0681
C0682
[C0683]
1
2
C0684
1
2
C0685
Hysteresis
Window
1.00
1.00
C0686
C0687
[C0688]
1
2
C0689
1
2
C0690
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
C0691
C0692
[C0693]
1
2
C0694
1
2
Hysteresis
Window
1.00
1.00
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Hysteresis of CMP3
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Window of CMP3
of CMP3
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
Analog input signals of
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP3
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
Function
-199.99
1
2
3
4
5
6
{0.01 %}
IN1 = IN 2
IN 1 > IN2
IN 1 < IN2
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|
199.99
Digital input signal of RFG1
Function comparator CMP1
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Window of CMP1
CMP1
5001 MCTRL-NACT
19500 FCODE-17
display only
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Hysteresis
Window
1.00
1.00
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Window of CMP2
of CMP2
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 CMP2
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
display only
Compares the inputs IN1
and IN2
IN1 = IN 2
IN 1 > IN2
IN 1 < IN2
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|
IN1 = IN 2
IN 1 > IN2
IN 1 < IN2
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|

and IN2
display only
compares the inputs IN1

and IN2
display only
9300BA0998
11-43
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0695 Function
[C0697]
1
2
C0698
1
2
[C0700]
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
C0701 DIS: IN
[C0703] CFG: IN
C0704 DIS: IN
C0710 Function
C0711 Pulse T
[C0713] CFG: IN
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
2
1
IN 1 < IN2
2
|IN1| < |IN2|
1000 FIXED 0INC
1000 FIXED 0INC
Info
Function comparator for
phase signals PHCMP1
Configuration phase inputs of
PHCMP1
Phase input signals of

-2147483647 {1} 2147483647 PHCMP1
19523 FCODE-472/3
-199.99 {0.01 %}
1000 FIXED 0 %
-199.99 {0.01 %}
0
0
Rising trans
1
Falling trans
2
Both trans
0.001 0.001
{0.001 s}
1000 FIXED 0
C0716 Pulse T
[C0718] CFG: IN
0.001
1000
0
Rising trans
1
Falling trans
2
Both trans
0.001
{0.001 s}
FIXED 0
199.99 Input signal of ANEG1

display only
Configuration input of ANEG2
199.99 Input signal ANEG2
Function edge evaluation
TRANS1
C0721 Delay T
[C0723] CFG: IN
1.000
1000
0
On delay
1
Off delay
2
On/Off delay
0.001
{0.001 s}
FIXED 0
Digital input signal of

TRANS1
Function edge evaluation
TRANS2
C0726 Delay T
[C0728] CFG: IN
1.0
1000
0
On delay
1
Off delay
2
On/Off delay
0.001
{0.001 s}
FIXED0

TRANS2
Function digital delay
component DIGDEL1
11-44
9300BA0998
0
1
display only
60.000 Delay time of DIGDEL1

DIGDEL1
DIGDEL1
Function digital delay
component DIGDEL2
display only
60.000 Delay time of DIGDEL2

DIGDEL2
C0729 DIS: IN
C0730 Mode
display only
60.000 Pulse time of TRANS2

TRANS2
C0724 DIS: IN
C0725 Function
display only
60.000 Pulse time of TRANS1

TRANS1
C0719 DIS: IN
C0720 Function
display only
Configuration input of von

ANEG1
C0714 DIS: IN
C0715 Function

and IN2
Start measurement
Stop measurement

DIGDEL2
Start / Stop of the
measurement recording of
OSZ
display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
C0735 Trigger level
Lenze Selection
0
Measurement completed
1
Measurement active
2
Trigger recognized
3
Cancel
4
Cancel after trigger
5
Read memory
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0
0
0
dig. trigger input
1
Channel 1
2
Channel 2
3
Channel 3
4
Channel 4
0
-32767
{1}
32767
C0736 Trigger edge
C0737 Trigger delay
0.0
C0738 Scanning period
C0731 Status
[C0732]
1
2
3
4
[C0733]
1
C0734
CFG: channel1
CFG: channel2
CFG: channel3
CFG: channel4
CFG: Dig. trigger
Trigger source
C0739 Number of channels 4

C0740
1 during start
2 Enabled/inhibited
IMPORTANT
Info
current operating state of
OSZ
display only

of OSZ
Configuration trigger input of

OSZ
Selection of the trigger
source of OSZ
Set trigger level for channel

1 ... 4 of OSZ
Selection of the trigger edge
of OSZ
0
LOW/HIGH edge
1
HIGH/LOW edge
-100.0
{0.1 %}
999.99 Setting pre and post
triggering of OSZ
3
1 ms
Selection of the scanning
period of OSZ
4
2 ms
5
5 ms
6
10 ms
7
20 ms
8
50 ms
9
100 ms
10
200 ms
11
500 ms
12
1s
13
2s
14
5s
15
10 s
16
20 s
17
50 s
18
1 min
19
2 min
20
5 min
21
10 min
1
{1}
4 Number of channels to be
measured of OSZ
Determine start point when
0
{1}
16383 reading the data memory of
OSZ
Deliberate selection of a
memory block
0
Data reading inhibited The data memory of OSZ
1
Data reading enabled must be enabled for reading
9300BA0998
11-45
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze Selection
C0741
1
2
3
4
DIS: Version
DIS: Memory size
DIS: Data width
DIS: Number of
channels
C0742 DIS: Data block
length
C0743 DIS: Read data
block
C0744 Memory size
C0749
1
2
3
C0750
DIS: Cancel index

DIS: Index trigger
DIS: Index end
Vp denom
2048
512
1024
1536
2048
3072
4096
8192
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
display only
Adapt memory depth of the

measurement task
Information on saving the

measured values
16
1000
1000

FIXED0
1.000
C0752 Max speed
3000
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP
0.000
C0754 PH error
C0755 Syn window
100
C0756 Offset
C0757 Function
0
0
[C0759] CFG: QSP
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
display only
Gain = 1
Denominator gain of position
controller of DFRFG1
Gain = 1/2
Gain = 1/4
Gain = 1/8
Gain = 1/16
Gain = 1/32
Gain = 1/64
Gain = 1/128
Gain = 1/256
Gain = 1/512
Gain = 1/1024
Gain = 1/2048
Gain = 1/4096
Gain = 1/8192
16384 Gain = 1/16384
0.001
{0.001 s} 999.900 Acceleration time Tir of
DFRFG1
1
{1 rpm}
16000 Maximum make up speed of
DFRFG1
0.000
{0.001 s} 999.900 Deceleration time Tif for QSP
of DFRFG1
10
{1 inc} 200000000 Contouring error of DFRFG1 * 2000000000
0
1 rev. = 65535 inc
0
{1 inc}
65535 Synchronization window of
DFRFG1
-1*109
{1 inc}
1*109 Offset of DFRFG1
0
no TP start
Function of DFRFG1
1
with TP start
Configuration phase input of
DFRFG1
FIXEDPHI-0
C0751 DFRFG1 Tir
9300BA0998
display only
Reading an 8 byte data block display only
[C0758] CFG: IN
11-46
IMPORTANT
Info
OSZ
Sub1 Version
Sub2 Memory size
Sub3 Data width
Sub4 Number of
channels
Data block length of OSZ
Configuration digital input

(triggering QSP) of DFRFG1
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0760] CFG: STOP
Possible settings
[C0761] CFG: RESET

1000
C0764
1
2
3
C0765
DIS: QSP
DIS: STOP
DIS: RESET
DIS: IN
C0766 Speed dir.
1000
[C0771] CFG: CLK
1000
[C0772] CFG: CLR
1000
{1 rpm}
1
cw / ccw
2
cw
3
ccw
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
Info
(ramp generator stop) of
DFRFG1
(reset integrators) of
DFRFG1
DFRFG1

of DFRFG1
[C0776] CFG: CLK

1000
[C0777] CFG: CLR
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0

AIN1-OUT
10251 R/L/Q-R/L
5650 ASW1-OUT
1000 FIXED0
5001 MCTRL-NACT
50
[C0781] CFG: N-INV

[C0782] CFG: NADD
[C0783] CFG: NADD-INV
[C0784] CFG: CINH-VAL
[C0785] CFG: SET

5000
[C0786] CFG: LOAD
5001

MCTRL-NSET2
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
display only
Configuration data input of

FLIP1
Configuration clock input of
FLIP1
Configuration reset input of
FLIP1
display only
Configuration data input of

FLIP2
Configuration clock input of
FLIP2
FLIP2
Digital input signals of FLIP2
DIS: D
DIS: CLK
DIS: CLR
CFG: N
display only
Preselection of the direction

of speed via DFRFG1
Digital input signals of FLIP1

DIS: D
DIS: CLK
DIS: CLR
CFG: D
1000
C0778
1
2
3
[C0780]

FIXED0
-32767
[C0770] CFG: D
C0773
1
2
3
[C0775]
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXED0
display only
Configuration main setpoint

input of NSET
Configuration main setpoint
inversion of NSET
Configuration additional
setpoint input of NSET
Configuration additional
setpoint inversion of NSET
Configuration output signal
with controller inhibit of
NSET
Configuration ramp
generator of NSET
(load ramp generator) of
NSET
9300BA0998
11-47
Appendix
Code
[C0787]
1
2
3
4
[C0788]
1
2
3
4
[C0789]
LCD
CFG: JOG*1
CFG: JOG*2
CFG: JOG*4
CFG: JOG*8
CFG: TI*1
CFG: TI*2
CFG: TI*4
CFG: TI*8
CFG: RFG-0
[C0790] CFG: RFG-STOP
C0798
1
2
C0799
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Possible settings
DIS: CINH-VAL
DIS: SET
-199.99
Binary interpretation
Configuration Ti selection
and Ti activation of NSET
- Binary interpretation
- Tir and Tif pairs are
identical

(ramp generator 0) of NSET
(ramp generator stop) of
NSET
Analog input signals of NSET display only
199.99
Digital input signals of NSET
1000
[C0801] CFG: ACT
1000
[C0802] CFG: INFLU
1000
[C0803] CFG: ADAPT
1000
[C0804] CFG: INACT
1000
[C0805] CFG: I-OFF
1000
11-48
{0.01 %}
Info
Configuration JOG selection
and JOG activation of NSET
display only
DIS: N-INV
DIS: NADD-INV
DIS: LOAD
DIS: JOG*1
DIS: JOG*2
DIS: JOG*4
DIS: JOG*8
DIS: TI*1
DIS: TI*2
DIS: TI*4
DIS: TI*8
DIS RFG-0
DIS: RFG-STOP
[C0800] CFG: SET
C0808
1
2
3
4
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
53
DIGIN3
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
DIS: SET
DIS: ACT
DIS: INFLU
DIS: ADAPT
9300BA0998

FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED0
FIXED0
-199.99
{0.01 %}
Configuration setpoint input

of process controller
PCTRL1
Configuration actual value
input of PCTRL1
Configuration evaluation
input of PCTRL1
Configuration adaptation
input of PCTRL1
Configuration inactivation
input of PCTRL1
(switch off I-component) of
PCTRL1
199.99 PCTRL1
display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
C809
1
2
[C0810]
1
2
[C0811]
DIS: INACT
DIS: I-OFF
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: SET
55
1000
1000
C0812
1 DIS: IN
2 DIS: IN
C0813 DIS: SET
[C0815]
1 CFG: IN
2 CFG: IN
[C0816] CFG: SET
{0.01 %}
1000
1000

FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED0
-199.99
{0.01 %}

ASW1
199.99 ASW1

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
display only
display only

of analog switch ASW2
ASW2
199.99 ASW2
Digital input signal of ASW2
1000
1000
1000
display only

of analog switch ASW1
Digital input signal of ASW1
C0817
1 DIS: IN
2 DIS: IN
C0818 DIS: SET
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN

AIN2-OUT
FIXED0%
FIXED0
-199.99
1000
[C0820]
1
2
3
C0821
1
2
3
[C0822]
1
2
3
C0823
1
2
3
[C0824]
1
2
3
C0825
1
2
3
Info
PCTRL1
display only
display only

the AND element AND1
Digital input signals of AND1 display only

DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0


DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0


DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
9300BA0998
11-49
Appendix
Code
[C0826]
1
2
3
C0827
1
2
3
[C0828]
1
2
3
C0829
1
2
3
[C0830]
1
2
3
C0831
1
2
3
[C0832]
1
2
3
C0833
1
2
3
[C0834]
1
2
3
C0835
1
2
3
[C0836]
1
2
3
C0837
1
2
3
[C0838]
1
2
3
11-50
LCD
Possible settings
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0
IMPORTANT
Info

DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0


DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0

the OR element OR1
Digital input signals of OR1
display only
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0

the OR element OR2
display only
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0

the OR element OR3
display only
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0

the OR element OR4

DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
9300BA0998
1000
1000
1000

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0

the OR element OR5
display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
C0839
1
2
3
[C0840]
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
1000

FIXED0
1000

FIXED0
C0841 DIS: IN
[C0842] CFG: IN
C0843 DIS: IN
[C0844] CFG: IN
1000

FIXED0
1000

FIXED0
1000

FIXED0
C0845 DIS: IN
[C0846] CFG: IN
C0847 DIS: IN
[C0848] CFG: IN
C0849
[C0850]
1
2
3
[C0851]
1
C0852
DIS: IN
CFG: OUT.W1
CFG: OUT.W2
CFG: OUT.W3
1000
1000
1000
CFG: OUT.D1
Type OUT.W2
1000
0
C0853 Type OUT.W3
C0854 Type OUT.W1
C0855 DIS: IN (0-15)

DIS: IN (16-31)
C0856
1
2
3
C0857
C0858
1
2
3
C0859
Info
DIS: IN.W1
DIS: IN.W2
DIS: IN.W3
DIS: IN.D1
DIS: OUT.W1
DIS: OUT.W2
DIS: OUT.W3
DIS: OUT.D1

FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED0INC
0
analog
1
digital 0-15
2
D1: low phase
3
D2: high phase
0
analog
1
digital 16-31
2
high phase
0
analog
3
D2: low phase
0
-199.99
{0.01%}

the digital NOT element
NOT1
Digital input signal of NOT1
NOT2
NOT3
NOT4
NOT5
Configuration process output
words for automation
interface AIF (X1)
display only
display only
display only
display only
display only
display only
Configuration 32-bit phase

information
word 2 for automation
interface AIF (X1)
interface AIF (X1)
interface AIF (X1)
FFFF Process input words
display only
hexadecimal for automation
interface X1
Process input words decimal display only
199.99
100% = 16384
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase information

Process output words
-199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99
display only
display only
100% = 16384
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase information
display only
9300BA0998
11-51
Appendix
Code
[C0860]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
[C0861]
1
2
3
C0863
1
2
3
4
5
6
C0864
1
2
3
C0865
1
2
3
C0866
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C0867
1
2
3
11-52
LCD
CFG: OUT1.W1
CFG: OUT1.W2
CFG: OUT1.W3
CFG: OUT2.W1
CFG: OUT2.W2
CFG: OUT2.W3
CFG: OUT2.W4
CFG: OUT3.W1
CFG: OUT3.W2
CFG: OUT3.W3
CFG: OUT3.W4
CFG: OUT1.D1
CFG: OUT2.D1
CFG: OUT3.D1
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0INC
1000 FIXED0INC
1000 FIXED0INC
DIS: IN1 dig0

DIS: IN1 dig16
DIS: IN2 dig0
DIS: IN2 dig16
DIS: IN3 dig0
DIS: IN3 dig16
0
0
0
0
1
2
analog sign
digital 0-15
low phase
Type OUT1.W3
Type OUT2.W2
Type OUT3.W2
0
0
0
0
1
2
analog sign
digital 16-31
high phase
DIS: IN1.D1
DIS: IN2.D1
DIS: IN3.D1
9300BA0998
-199.99
Configuration 32-bit phase

information for system bus
output blocks (CAN)
Process input words
display only
FFFF hexadecimal for system bus
(CAN)
Type OUT1.W2
Type OUT2.W1
Type OUT3.W1
DIS: IN1.W1
DIS: IN1.W2
DIS: IN1.W3
DIS: IN2.W1
DIS: IN2.W2
DIS: IN2.W3
DIS: IN2.W4
DIS: IN3.W1
DIS: IN3.W2
DIS: IN3.W3
DIS: IN3.W4
Info
words for system bus output
blocks (CAN)
{0.01 %}

words for system bus (CAN)

words for system bus (CAN)
Process input words for

199.99 system bus (CAN)
32-bit phase information for

-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 system bus (CAN)
display only
100% = 16384
display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
C0868
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C0869
1
2
3
[C0870]
1
2
[C0871]
DIS: OUT1.W1
DIS: OUT1.W2
DIS: OUT1.W3
DIS: OUT2.W1
DIS: OUT2.W2
DIS: OUT2.W3
DIS: OUT2.W4
DIS: OUT3.W1
DIS: OUT3.W2
DIS: OUT3.W3
DIS: OUT3.W4
-199.99
32-bit phase information for

-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 system bus (CAN)
DIS: OUT1.D1
DIS: OUT2.D1
DIS: OUT3.D1
CFG: CINH
CFG: CINH
1000
1000
CFG: TRIP-SET
54
CFG: TRIP-RES
55
[C0876]
C0878
1
2
3
4
C0879
1
2
3
[C0880]
1
2
[C0881]
{0.01 %}

FIXED0
FIXED0
DIGIN 4
DIGIN 5
DIS: CINH1
DIS: CINH2
DIS: TRIP-SET
DIS: TRIP-RES
Reset C135
Reset AIF
Reset CAN
0
1
CFG: PAR*1
CFG: PAR*2
1000
1000
CFG:PAR-LOAD
1000
C0884
1 DIS: PAR*1
2 DIS: PAR*2
3 DIS: PAR-LOAD
[C0885]
CFG: R
[C0886]
CFG: L
C0889
1 DIS: R
2 DIS: L
[C0890] CFG: N-SET
Info
Process output words system display only
199.99 bus (CAN)
100% = 16384
Configuration digital inputs

(inhibit controller) of DCTRL
(TRIP-Set) of DCTRL
(TRIP-Reset) of DCTRL
DCTRL
display only
Reset of control words
- C0879 = 1 performs
one reset
no reset
reset

FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
Configuration parameter set

selection of DCTRL
Configuration Load
parameter set of DCTRL
Signals for parameter set
selection of DCTRL
51
52

DIGIN 1
DIGIN 2
display only
display only

(CW rotation) of R/L/Q
(CCW rotation) of R/L/Q
Digital input signals of R/L/Q display only
5050
[C0891] CFG: M-ADD
1000

NSET-NOUT
FIXED0%
Configuration speed setpoint

input motor control MCTRL
Configuration torque setpoint
input of MCTRL
9300BA0998
11-53
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0892] CFG: LO-M-LIM

[C0893] CFG: HI-M-LIM
[C0894] CFG: PHI-SET
[C0895] CFG: PHI-LIM
[C0896] CFG: N2-LIM
[C0897] CFG: PHI-ON
Possible settings
[C0898] CFG: FLD-WEAK

1006
[C0899] CFG: N/M-SWT
1000
[C0900] CFG: QSP
[C0901] CFG: I-SET
1000
DIS: N-SET
DIS: M-ADD
DIS: LO-M-LIM
DIS: HI-M-LIM
DIS: PHI-LIM
DIS: N2-LIM
DIS: FLD-WEAK
DIS: I-SET
[C0920] CFG: ON
1000
[C0921] CFG: MARK
1000
[C0922] CFG: PHI-IN
1000
[C0923] CFG: N-IN
1000
11-54
9300BA0998

FIXED0
-199.99
DIS: PHI-ON
DIS: N/M-SWT
DIS: QSP
DIS: I-LOAD
DIS: PHI-SET
C0909 speed limit

FIXED100%
FIXED0

10250 R/L/Q-QSP
1000 FIXED0%
[C0902] CFG: I-LOAD
C0906
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C0907
1
2
3
4
C0908
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
5700 ANEG1-OUT
19523 FCODE-472/3
1000 FIXED0INC
1006 FIXED100%
1000 FIXED0%
1000 FIXED0
{0.01 %}
Info
Configuration lower torque
limit of MCTRL
Configuration upper torque
limit of MCTRL
Configuration rotor position
setpoint of MCTRL
Configuration phase
controller limit of MCTRL
Configuration 2nd speed
limitation value of MCTRL
Configuration switch-on
signal phase controller of
MCTRL
Configuration signal for field
weakening of MCTRL
Configuration change-over
between speed control and
torque control MCTRL
Configuration control signal
to activate QSP of MCTRL
Configuration Load
I-component of the MCTRL
speed controller
Configuration release signal
to load the I-component of
the MCTRL speed controller
199.99 MCTRL
display only

MCTRL
display only
-2147483647{1 inc}
2147483647
Set phase signal of MCTRL
display only
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
1
+ /- 175 %
2
0 .. + 175 %
3
-175 .. 0 %
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0INC
FIXED0%
Speed limitation for the

MCTRL speed setpoint
Configuration activating input
homing of REF
Configuration digital homing
switch of REF
Configuration phase input of
REF
Configuration speed input of
REF
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0924] CFG: POS-LOAD

[C0925] CFG: ACTPOS-I
C0926
1
2
3
4
C0927
1
2
3
C0928
DIS: ACTPOS-I
DIS: PHI-IN
DIS: ACTPOS
DIS: TARGET
Possible settings
DIS: ON
DIS: MARK
DIS: LOAD
DIS: PHI-IN
-199.99
1
[C0931] Gearbox enc
C0932 REF mode
0
0
1
6
7
8
9
20
21
0
C0934 REF offset
C0935 REF speed
2.000
0
1.00
1
1
REF Ti
Numerator
Denominator
CFG: IN
1000
C0943 DIS: IN
C0945 Numerator
C0946 Denominator
[C0947] CFG: IN
-199.99
1
1
1000
C0948 DIS: IN
C0950 Numerator
C0951 Denominator
Configuration of the position

Set position of REF
Phase input signals of REF
display only
digital input signals of REF
display only
1
1
{0.01 %}
{1}
{1}
199.99 Analog input signal of REF

65535 Gearbox factor (numerator)
for REF
65535 Gearbox factor (denominator)
for REF
Homing mode for REF
Rising trans
Falling trans
{0.01 %}
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
FIXED0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
-32767
1
display only
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
display only
Mode 0
Mode 1
Mode 6
Mode 7
Mode 8
Mode 9
Mode 20
Mode 21
Referfence signal edge for

REF
Rising edge
falling edge
-2140000000{1 inc} 21400000 Reference offset for REF
00
0.0001 {0.0001 % Nmax} 100.0 Homing speed for REF
000
0.01
{0.01 s}
990.00 T i time homing of REF
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
CONV1
FIXED0%
0
1
C0936
C0940
C0941
[C0942]
Info
Configuration of the control
Set position of REF
-2147483647{1 inc} 21474836 Phase signal (contouring

47
error) of REF
C0929 DIS: N-IN

[C0930] Gearbox mot
C0933 REF trans
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXED0
1000 FIXED0INC
-2147483647{1 inc} 21474836
47
{1}
{1}
- Tir and Tif are identical
199.99 Relative analog input signal

of CONV1
CONV2
display only

of CONV2
display only
9300BA0998
11-55
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0952] CFG: IN
C0953 DIS: IN
C0955 Numerator
C0956 Denominator
[C0957] CFG: IN
Possible settings
1
1
1000
C0958 DIS: IN
C0960 Function
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
FIXEDPHI0
-32767
{1 rpm}
C0961 y0
0.00
1
2
3
0.00
C0962 y1
50.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
C0963 y2
75.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
C0964 y100
0.00
{0.01 %}
C0965 x1
100.0
0
50.00
0.01
{0.01 %}
C0966 x2
75.00
0.01
{0.01 %}
1000

FIXED0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
[C0967] CFG: IN
C0968 DIS: IN
[C0970] CFG: N-SET
1000
1000

FIXED0%
1000

FIXED0%
1000

FIXED0%
1000

FIXED0%
[C0971] CFG: FAULT

1000
[C0972] CFG: RESET
1000
[C0973] CFG: ADAPT
[C0974] CFG: CONST
[C0975] CFG: THRESHLD
[C0976] CFG: NACT
[C0977] CFG: SET
9300BA0998
Function1
Function2
Function3
{0.01 %}

FIXED0%
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0%
1000
11-56
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXEDPHI0
-32767
{1 rpm}
Info
CONV3
of CONV3
CONV4
display only

of CONV4
Characteristic CURVE1-IN
display only
199.99 Ordinate of the pair

(x= 0%/y0) of CURVE1
199.99 Ordinate of the pair (x1/y1) of
CURVE1
199.99 Ordinate of the pair (x2/y2) of
CURVE1
199.99 Ordinate of the pair
(x= 100%/y100) of CURVE1
100.00 Abscissa of the pair (x1/y1)
of CURVE1
99.00 Abscissa of the pair (x2/y2)
of CURVE1
Configuration characteristic
CURVE1-IN
of CONV1
Configuration speed input of
mains failure control MFAIL
Configuration input mains
failure detected of MFAIL
Configuration reset mains
failure control of MFAIL
Configuration of MFAIL
Adaptation of the P-gain of
the voltage controller
Adaptation of the P-gain of
the voltage controller
Restart protection when the
value falls below the speed
threshold
- Comparison value for
threshold function
- Start for U2 controller
Configuration speed start
value for MFAIL
display only
Setpoint path
Input for activation
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0978] CFG: DC-SET

C0980 MFAIL Vp
C0981 MFAIL Tn
C0982 MFAIL Tir
C0983
C0988
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C0989
1
2
[C0990]
Retrigger T
Possible settings
1.000
DIS: N-SET
DIS: ADAPT
DIS: CONST
DIS: THRESHLD
DIS: NACT
DIS: SET
DIS: DC-SET
0.001
{0.001 s}
-199.99
{0.01 %}
Info
Configuration setpoint DC
bus voltage for MFAIL
31.000 Gain Vp of MFAIL
2000 Time constant of MFAIL
16.000 Acceleration time Tir of
MFAIL
60.000
199.99 MFAIL
display only
Digital input signals of MFAIL display only

DIS: FAULT
DIS: RESET
CFG: IN
1000
[C0991] CFG: RESET

1000
C0992 DIS: IN
C0993 DIS: RESET
C0995 Division
[C0996] CFG: IN
1000
C0997 DIS: IN
C1000 Division
[C1001] CFG: IN
1
1000
C1002 DIS: IN
C1010 Function
[C1011]
1
2
C1012
1
2
[C1030]
IMPORTANT
Lenze Selection
1000 FIXED0%
0.500 0.001
{0.001}
100
20
{1 ms}
2.000 0.001
{0.001 s}
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
1000
[C1031] CFG: RESET

1000

FIXEDPHI0
FIXED0
-32767
{1}
-31
{1}
Configuration input phase

integrator PHINT1
PHINT1
32767 Input signal of PHINT1
display only
Digital input signal of PHINT1 display only
31 Division factor of phase
division PHDIV1
Configuration input phase
division PHDIV1

FIXED0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
0
{1}
31
FIXED0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
Input signal of PHDIV1

display only
Division factor
Configuration input of CONVPHA1
Input signal of
CONVPHA1
Function of ARITPH1
0
OUT = IN1
1
IN1 + IN2
2
IN1 - IN2
3
IN1 * IN2
14
IN1 / IN2
21
IN1 + IN2 (no limit)
22
IN1 - IN2 (no limit)
Configuration inputs
ARITPH1
FIXED0INC
FIXED0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Input signals ARITPH1

FIXEDPHI0
FIXED0
display only
display only
Configuration input PHINT2

PHINT2
9300BA0998
11-57
Appendix
Code
LCD
C1032 DIS: IN
C1033 DIS: RESET
C1040 Accelaration
C1041 Jerk
[C1042] CFG: IN
Possible settings
Lenze Selection
-32767
100.0
00
0.200
1000
[C1043] CFG: SET

1000
[C1044] CFG: LOAD
1000
C1045
1
2
C1046
C1090
C1091
C1092
C1093
DIS: IN
DIS: SET
DIS: LOAD
Output signal
Code
Subcode
Numerator
C1094 Denomiator
C1095 Offset
[C1096] CFG: IN
[C1097] CFG: LOAD
141
0
1.000
0
0.000
1
0
1000
1000
C1098 DIS: IN
0.001
IMPORTANT
Info
{1}
32767 Input signal of PHINT2
display only
Digital input signal of PHINT2 display only
{0.001} 5000.000 Acceleration of SRFG1
0.001
{0.001} 999.999 Set jerk of SRFG1
Configuration input of SRFG1
FIXED0%
Configuration input of SRFG1
FIXED0%
SRFG1
FIXED0
Input signals of SRFG1
display only
-199.99
{0.01 %} 199.99
-2147483648 {1}2147483647
2
{1}
2000
0
{1}
255
0.0001
{0.0001}100000.0
000
0.0001
{1} 100000.000
0
0
{1}1000000000
FIXED0%
FIXED0
-32768
{1}
32767
C1099 DIS: LOAD

C1100 Function
[C1101]
1
2
[C1102]
1
2
3
C1103
1
2
C1104
1
2
3
C1120
CFG: LD-VAL
CFG: CMP-VAL
1000
1000
CFG: CLKUP
CFG: CLKDWN
CFG: LOAD
1000
1000
1000
DIS: LD-VAL
DIS: CMP-VAL
DIS: CLKUP
DIS: CLKDWN
DIS: LOAD
Sync mode
[C1121]
11-58
9300BA0998
1
Return
2
Hold
FIXED0%
FIXED0%
FIXED0
FIXED0
FIXED0
-32768
0
1
2
0
{1}
off
CAN sync
Terminal sync
{1 ms}
Digital input signal of SRFG1 display only

Output signal of FEVAN1
display only
Code for FEVAN1
Subcode for FEVAN1
FEVAN1 numerator
FEVAN1 denominator
FEVAN1 offset
FEVAN1
FEVAN1
Analog input signal of FEVAN1
Digital input signal of FEVAN1
Function of FCNT1
display only
display only

of FCNT1
FCNT1

32768 FCNT1
display only

FCNT1
display only
Function of SYNC1
13 SYNC1
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
1 Sync cycle
Lenze Selection
2
2 Interpol. cycl
C1122 Sync time
0.460
C1123
1 Phaseshift
2 Sync Window
[C1024] CFG: IN1

1000
[C1025] CFG: IN2
1000
[C1026] CFG: IN3
1000
C1027 DIS: IN1
IMPORTANT
Info
Definition of the cycle time of for SYSTEMBUS only
the sync signals (in the slave)
Definition of the interpolation - only for terminal
time between the sync
- the interpolation is
signals (in the slave)
restarted with every
sync signal
0.000
{0.001 ms} 10.000 Phase shift between the CAN - for SYSTEMBUS only
sync and internal control
- depending on the baud
program cycle
rate and bus load
-1.000 {0.001 ms} 1.000 Phase shift between terminal only for terminal sync
sync and internal control program cycle
0.000
{0.001 ms} 1.000 Window for the
- only for terminal sync
synchronization edge of the - activates when the sync
terminal sync (LOW/HIGH
start window is quit
edge)
Configuration input of SYNC1
FIXED0INC
FIXED0INC
FIXED0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Input signal of
9300BA0998
11-59
Appendix
11.4
Selection lists
Selection list 1, analog output signals (L)

000050
AIN1-OUT
010000
000055
AIN2-OUT
015028
000100
DFSET-NOUT
019500
001000
FIXED0%
019502
001006
FIXED100%
019503
001007
FIXED-100%
019504
005000
MCTRL-NSET2
019505
005001
MCTRL-NACT
019506
005002
MCTRL-MSET2
019507
005003
MCTRL-MACT
019510
005004
MCTRL-IACT
019511
005005
MCTRL-DCVOLT
019512
005009
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
019513
005050
NSET-NOUT
019515
005051
NSET-RFG-I
019521
005100
MPOT1-OUT
019522
005150
005200
005500
005505
005550
005600
005610
005611
005650
005655
005660
005665
005700
005705
005750
005800
005850
005900
005950
006100
006150
006200
006205
006210
006215
006230
006300
006350
006400
006600
11-60
9300BA0998
PCTRL1-OUT
REF-N-SET
ARIT1-OUT
ARIT2-OUT
ADD1-OUT
RFG1-OUT
SRFG1-OUT
SRFG1-DIFF
ASW1-OUT
ASW2-OUT
ASW3-OUT
ASW4-OUT
ANEG1-OUT
ANEG2-OUT
FIXSET1-OUT
LIM1-OUT
ABS1-OUT
PT1-1-OUT
DT1-1-OUT
MFAIL-NOUT
DB1-OUT
CONV1-OUT
CONV2-OUT
CONV3-OUT
CONV4-OUT
CONVPHA1-OUT
S&H1-OUT
CURVE1-OUT
FCNT1-OUT
SYNC1-OUT3
019523
019524
019525
019526
019527
019528
019529
019530
019531
019532
019533
019534
019535
019536
019537
019538
019539
019540
019551
019552
019553
019554
019555
019556
019557
019558
019559
019560
BRK-M-SET
UTILIZATION
FCODE-17
FCODE-26/1
FCODE-26/2
FCODE-27/1
FCODE-27/2
FCODE-32
FCODE-37
FCODE-108/1
FCODE-108/2
FCODE-109/1
FCODE-109/2
FCODE-141
FCODE-472/1
FCODE-472/2
FCODE-472/3
FCODE-472/4
FCODE-472/5
FCODE-472/6
FCODE-472/7
FCODE-472/8
FCODE-472/9
FCODE-472/10
FCODE-472/11
FCODE-472/12
FCODE-472/13
FCODE-472/14
FCODE-472/15
FCODE-472/16
FCODE-472/17
FCODE-472/18
FCODE-472/19
FCODE-472/20
FCODE-473/1
FCODE-473/2
FCODE-473/3
FCODE-473/4
FCODE-473/5
FCODE-473/6
FCODE-473/7
FCODE-473/8
FCODE-473/9
FCODE-473/10
020101
020102
020103
020201
020202
020203
020204
020301
020302
020303
020304
025101
025102
025103
CAN-IN1.W1
CAN-IN1.W2
CAN-IN1.W3
CAN-IN2.W1
CAN-IN2.W2
CAN-IN2.W3
CAN-IN2.W4
CAN-IN3.W1
CAN-IN3.W2
CAN-IN3.W3
CAN-IN3.W4
AIF-IN.W1
AIF-IN.W2
AIF-IN.W3
Appendix
Selection list 2, digital output signals (P)

000051 DIGIN1
010000 BRK1-OUT
000052 DIGIN2
010001 BRK1-CINH
000053 DIGIN3
010002 BRK1-QSP
000054 DIGIN4
010003 BRK1-M-STORE
000055 DIGIN5
010250 R/L/Q-QSP
000060 STATE-BUS-O
010251 R/L/Q-R/L
000065 DIGIN-CINH
010500 AND1-OUT
000100 DFSET-ACK
010505 AND2-OUT
000500 DCTRL-RDY
010510 AND3-OUT
000501 DCTRL-CINH
010515 AND4-OUT
000502 DCTRL-INIT
010520 AND5-OUT
000503 DCTRL-IMP
010525 AND6-OUT
000504 DCTRL-NACT= 0
010530 AND7-OUT
000505 DCTRL-CW/CCW
010550 OR1-OUT
001000 FIXED0
010555 OR2-OUT
001001 FIXED1
010560 OR3-OUT
002000 DCTRL-PAR*1-O
010565 OR4-OUT
002001 DCTRL-PAR*2-O
010570 OR5-OUT
002002 DCTRL-PARBUSY
010600 NOT1-OUT
005001 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
010605 NOT2-OUT
005002 MCTRL-IMAX
010610 NOT3-OUT
005003 MCTRL-MMAX
010615 NOT4-OUT
005050 NSET-RFG-I= 0
010620 NOT5-OUT
005200 REF-OK
010650 CMP1-OUT
005201 REF-BUSY
010655 CMP2-OUT
006000 DFRFG1-FAIL
010660 CMP3-OUT
006001 DFRFG1-SYNC
010680 PHCMP1-OUT
006100 MFAIL-STATUS
010685 PHCMP2-OUT
006101 MFAIL-I-RESET
010690 PHCMP3-OUT
006400 FCNT1-EQUAL
010700 DIGDEL1-OUT
006600 SYNC1-STAT
010705 DIGDEL2-OUT
010750 TRANS1-OUT
010755 TRANS2-OUT
010760 TRANS3-OUT
010765 TRANS4-OUT
010900 FLIP1-OUT
010905 FLIP2-OUT
012000 PHINT1-FAIL
012005 PHINT2-FAIL
012010 PHINT3-STAT
013000 FEVAN1-BUSY
013001 FEVAN1-FAIL
013005 FEVAN2-BUSY
013006 FEVAN2-FAIL
014050 STORE1-TP-INH
014055 STORE2-TP-INH
015000
015001
015002
015003
015010
015011
015012
015013
015014
015015
015016
015017
015018
015019
015020
015021
015022
015023
015024
015026
015027
015028
015029
015030
015031
015032
015033
015034
015040
015041
015042
015043
DCTRL-TRIP
DCTRL-MESS
DCTRL-WARN
DCTRL-FAIL
MONIT-LU
MONIT-OU
MONIT-EEr
MONIT-OC1
MONIT-OC2
MONIT-LP1
MONIT-OH
MONIT-OH3
MONIT-OH4
MONIT-OH7
MONIT-OH8
MONIT-Sd2
MONIT-Sd3
MONIT-P03
MONIT-P13
MONIT-CE0
MONIT-NMAX
MONIT-OC5
MONIT-SD5
MONIT-SD6
MONIT-SD7
MONIT-H07
MONIT-H10
MONIT-H11
MONIT-CE1
MONIT-CE2
MONIT-CE3
MONIT-CE4
019500
019521
019522
019523
019524
019525
019526
019527
019528
019529
019530
019531
019532
019533
019534
019535
019536
019537
019538
019539
019540
019541
019542
019543
019544
019545
019546
019547
019548
019549
019550
019551
019552
019751
019752
019753
019755
019756
019757
019758
019763
019764
019765
019766
FCODE-250
FCODE-471.B0
FCODE-471.B1
FCODE-471.B2
FCODE-471.B3
FCODE-471.B4
FCODE-471.B5
FCODE-471.B6
FCODE-471.B7
FCODE-471.B8
FCODE-471.B9
FCODE-471.B10
FCODE-471.B11
FCODE-471.B12
FCODE-471.B13
FCODE-471.B14
FCODE-471.B15
FCODE-471.B16
FCODE-471.B17
FCODE-471.B18
FCODE-471.B19
FCODE-471.B20
FCODE-471.B21
FCODE-471.B22
FCODE-471.B23
FCODE-471.B24
FCODE-471.B25
FCODE-471.B26
FCODE-471.B27
FCODE-471.B28
FCODE-471.B29
FCODE-471.B30
FCODE-471.B31
FCODE-135.B0
FCODE-135.B1
FCODE-135.B2
FCODE-135.B4
FCODE-135.B5
FCODE-135.B6
FCODE-135.B7
FCODE-135.B12
FCODE-135.B13
FCODE-135.B14
FCODE-135.B15
9300BA0998
11-61
Appendix
Selection list 2, digital output signals (P), continued

020001 CAN-CTRL.B0
020201 CAN-IN2.B0
020002 CAN-CTRL.B1
020202 CAN-IN2.B1
020003 CAN-CTRL.B2
020203 CAN-IN2.B2
020005 CAN-CTRL.B4
020204 CAN-IN2.B3
020006 CAN-CTRL.B5
020205 CAN-IN2.B4
020007 CAN-CTRL.B6
020206 CAN-IN2.B5
020008 CAN-CTRL.B7
020207 CAN-IN2.B6
020013 CAN-CTRL.B12
020208 CAN-IN2.B7
020014 CAN-CTRL.B13
020209 CAN-IN2.B8
020015 CAN-CTRL.B14
020210 CAN-IN2.B9
020016 CAN-CTRL.B15
020211 CAN-IN2.B10
020101 CAN-IN1.B0
020212 CAN.IN2.B11
020102 CAN-IN1.B1
020213 CAN-IN2.B12
020103 CAN-IN1.B2
020214 CAN-IN2.B13
020104 CAN-IN1.B3
020215 CAN-IN2.B14
020105 CAN-IN1.B4
020216 CAN-IN2.B15
020106 CAN-IN1.B5
020217 CAN-IN2.B16
020107 CAN-IN1.B6
020218 CAN-IN2.B17
020108 CAN-IN1.B7
020219 CAN-IN2.B18
020109 CAN-IN1.B8
020220 CAN-IN2.B19
020110 CAN-IN1.B9
020221 CAN-IN2.B20
020111 CAN-IN1.B10
020222 CAN-IN2.B21
020112 CAN-IN1.B11
020223 CAN-IN2.B22
020113 CAN-IN1.B12
020224 CAN-IN2.B23
020114 CAN-IN1.B13
020225 CAN-IN2.B24
020115 CAN-IN1.B14
020226 CAN-IN2.B25
020116 CAN-IN1.B15
020227 CAN-IN2.B26
020117 CAN-IN1.B16
020228 CAN-IN2.B27
020118 CAN-IN1.B17
020229 CAN-IN2.B28
020119 CAN-IN1.B18
020230 CAN-IN2.B29
020120 CAN-IN1.B19
020231 CAN-IN2.B30
020121 CAN-IN1.B20
020232 CAN-IN2.B31
020122 CAN-IN1.B21
020123 CAN-IN1.B22
020124 CAN-IN1.B23
020125 CAN-IN1.B24
020126 CAN-IN1.B25
020127 CAN-IN1.B26
020128 CAN-IN1.B27
020129 CAN-IN1.B28
020130 CAN-IN1.B29
020131 CAN-IN1.B30
020132 CAN-IN1.B31
11-62
9300BA0998
020301
020302
020303
020304
020305
020306
020307
020308
020309
020310
020311
020312
020313
020314
020315
020316
020317
020318
020319
020320
020321
020322
020323
020324
020325
020326
020327
020328
020329
020330
020331
020332
CAN-IN3.B0
CAN-IN3.B1
CAN-IN3.B2
CAN-IN3.B3
CAN-IN3.B4
CAN-IN3.B5
CAN-IN3.B6
CAN-IN3.B7
CAN-IN3.B8
CAN-IN3.B9
CAN-IN3.B10
CAN-IN3.B11
CAN-IN3.B12
CAN-IN3.B13
CAN-IN3.B14
CAN-IN3.B15
CAN-IN3.B16
CAN-IN3.B17
CAN-IN3.B18
CAN-IN3.B19
CAN-IN3.B20
CAN-IN3.B21
CAN-IN3.B22
CAN-IN3.B23
CAN-IN3.B24
CAN-IN3.B25
CAN-IN3.B26
CAN-IN3.B27
CAN-IN3.B28
CAN-IN3.B29
CAN-IN3.B30
CAN-IN3.B31
025001
025002
025003
025005
025006
025007
025008
025013
025014
025015
025016
025101
025102
025103
025104
025105
025106
025107
025108
025109
025110
025111
025112
025113
025114
025115
025116
025117
025118
025119
025120
025121
025122
025123
025124
025125
025126
025127
025128
025129
025130
025131
025132
AIF-CTRL.B0
AIF-CTRL.B1
AIF-CTRL.B2
AIF-CTRL.B4
AIF-CTRL.B5
AIF-CTRL.B6
AIF-CTRL.B7
AIF-CTRL.B12
AIF-CTRL.B13
AIF-CTRL.B14
AIF-CTRL.B15
AIF-IN.B0
AIF-IN.B1
AIF-IN.B2
AIF-IN.B3
AIF-IN.B4
AIF-IN.B5
AIF-IN.B6
AIF-IN.B7
AIF-IN.B8
AIF-IN.B9
AIF-IN.B10
AIF-IN.B11
AIF-IN.B12
AIF-IN.B13
AIF-IN.B14
AIF-IN.B15
AIF-IN.B16
AIF-IN.B17
AIF-IN.B18
AIF-IN.B19
AIF-IN.B20
AIF-IN.B21
AIF-IN.B22
AIF-IN.B23
AIF-IN.B24
AIF-IN.B25
AIF-IN.B26
AIF-IN.B27
AIF-IN.B28
AIF-IN.B29
AIF-IN.B30
AIF-IN.B31
Appendix
Selection list 3,
Phase signals (s)
000100 DFSET-PSET
000101 DFSET-PSET2
001000 FIXED0INC
005000 MCTRL-PHI-ANG
005200 REF-PSET
005520 ARITPH1-OUT
005580 PHADD1-OUT
005581 PHADD1-OUT2
006235 CONVPHPH1-OUT
006600 SYNC1-OUT2
012000 PHINT1-OUT
012005 PHINT2-OUT
012010 PHINT3-OUT
012050 PHDIV1-OUT
014000 PHDIFF1-OUT
014050
014051
014052
014053
014055
014056
014057
014100
019521
019522
019523
019524
019525
020103
020201
020301
025103
STORE1-PHACT
STORE1-PH1
STORE1-PH2
STORE1-PHDIFF
STORE2-PHACT
STORE2-PH1
STORE1-PH2
GEARCOMP-OUT
FCODE-474/1
FCODE-474/2
FCODE-474/3
FCODE-474/4
FCODE-474/5
CAN-IN1.D1
CAN-IN2.D1
CAN-IN3.D1
AIF-IN.D1
Selection list 4,
Phase difference signals (D)
000050 DFIN-OUT
000100 DFSET-POUT
000250 DFOUT-OUT
001000 FIXEDPHI-0
005000 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
006000 DFRFG-OUT
006220 CONV5-OUT
006225 CONV6-OUT
006230 CONVPHA1-OUT2
006240 CONVPP1-OUT
006600 SYNC1-OUT1
019521 FCODE-475/1
019522 FCODE-475/2
Selection list 5,
Function blocks
000000 empty
000050 AIN1
000055 AIN2
000070 AOUT1
000075 AOUT2
000100 DFSET
000200 DFIN
000250 DFOUT
005050 NSET
005100 MPOT1
005150 PCTRL1
005200 REF
005500 ARIT1
005505 ARIT2
005520 ARITPH1
005550 ADD1
005580 PHADD1
005600 RFG1
005610 SRFG1
005650 ASW1
005655 ASW2
005660 ASW3
005665 ASW4
005700 ANEG1
005705 ANEG2
005750 FIXSET1
005800 LIM1
005850 ABS1
005900 PT1-1
005950 DT1-1
006000 DFRFG1
006100 MFAIL
006150 DB1
006200 CONV1
006205 CONV2
006210 CONV3
006215 CONV4
006220 CONV5
006225 CONV6
006230 CONVPHA1
006235 CONVPHPH1
006240 CONVPP1
006300 S&H1
006350 CURVE1
006420 FCNT1
006600 SYNC1
010000
010250
010500
010505
010510
010515
010520
010525
010530
010550
010555
010560
010565
010570
010600
010605
010610
010615
010620
010650
010655
010660
010680
010685
010690
010700
010705
010750
010755
010760
010765
010900
010905
012000
012005
012010
012050
013000
013005
013100
014000
014050
014055
014100
015100
020000
025000
BRK1
R/L/Q
AND1
AND2
AND3
AND4
AND5
AND6
AND7
OR1
OR2
OR3
OR4
OR5
NOT1
NOT2
NOT3
NOT4
NOT5
CMP1
CMP2
CMP3
PHCMP1
PHCMP2
PHCMP3
DIGDEL1
DIGDEL2
TRANS1
TRANS2
TRANS3
TRANS4
FLIP1
FLIP2
PHINT1
PHINT2
PHINT3
PHDIV1
FEVAN1
FEVAN2
TR
PHDIFF1
STORE1
STORE2
GEARCOMP
MLP1
CAN-OUT
AIF-OUT
9300BA0998
11-63
Appendix
Selection list 10, error list

000000 No fail
000011 OC1 trip
000012 OC2 trip
000015 OC5 trip
000022 LUQ trip
000032 LP1 trip
000050 OH trip
000053 OH3 trip
000057 OH7 trip
000058 OH8 trip
000061 CE0 trip
000062 CE1 trip
000063 CE2 trip
000064 CE3 trip
000065 CE4 trip
000070 U15 trip
000071 CCr trip
000072 Pr1 trip
000073 Pr2 trip
000074 PEr trip
000075 Pr0 trip
000077 Pr3 trip
000078 Pr4 trip
000079 PI trip
000082 Sd2 trip
000083 Sd3 trip
000085 Sd5 trip
000086 Sd6 trip
000087 Sd7 trip
000091 EEr trip
11-64
9300BA0998
000105
000107
000110
000111
000153
000163
000166
000200
001020
001030
001091
002032
002054
002057
002058
002061
002062
002063
002064
002065
002082
002083
002085
002086
002091
002153
002163
002166
H05 trip
H07 trip
H10 trip
H11 trip
P03 trip
P13 trip
P16 trip
NMAX trip
OU message
LU message
EEr message
LP1 warning
OH4 warning
OH7 warning
OH8 warning
CE0 warning
CE1 warning
CE2 warning
CE3 warning
CE4 warning
Sd2 warning
Sd3 warning
Sd5 warning
Sd6 warning
EER warning
P03 warning
P13 warning
P16 warning
Appendix
11.5
Glossary
Term
AIF
CAN
CE
Code
Contouring error
Contouring error tolerance
Ctrl. enable
Ctrl. inhibit
Fieldbus
Following error monitoring
FPDA
FPDE
GDC
InterBus-S
JOG
KTY
LECOM
LEMOC2
LU
Master
OU
PC
PLC
PM
Process data
PROFIBUS
PTC
QSP
RFG
Slave
SSC
SSI
Target position
TKO
Meaning
Automation interface (X1)
Controller Area Network
Communaut Europenne (English: European Community)
For entry and display (access) of parameter values.
Variable addressing according to the format code/subcode (Cxxxx/xx).
All variables can be addressed via the code digits.
Deviation between momentary position setpoint and actual position. Display for a momentary following
error under C0908.
If the contouring error reaches a defined following error tolerance, a fault indication is released.
Controller enable
Controller inhibit ( = Controller enable )
For data exchange between superimposed control and positioning control, e.g. InterBus-S or
PROFIBUS DP
Monitors the momentary following error if the following error tolerance is exceeded and releases a fault
indication, if necessary.
Freely programmable digital output
Freely programmable digital input
Global Drive Control (PC-program (Windows) for Lenze controllers)
Industrial communication standard to DIN E19258
Fixed speed or input for fixed speed
Linear thermal sensor of the motor winding
Lenze Communication
PC-program (DOS) for Lenze controllers
Undervoltage
Masters are host systems, e.g. PLC or PC.
Overvoltage
Personal Computer
Programmable logic controller
Permanent magnet
For instance, setpoints and actual values of controllers which must be exchanged within a minimum of
time. Process data are usually small amounts of data which are to be transmitted cyclically.
For PROFIBUS, these data are transmitted in the logic process data channel.
Communication standard DIN 19245, consisting of part 1, part 2 and part 3
PTC thermistor with defined tripping characteristic
Quick stop
Ramp generator
Bus participant which may only send after the request of the master.Controllers are slaves.
Sensorless control
Synchronous serial interface
The target which is to be approached by means of a defined travelling profile.
Thermostat / normally-closed contact
9300BA0998
11-65
Appendix
Accessories, 11-1
Accessory kit, 1-1
Cable cross-sections, 3-6, 4-13
Actual value display, 7-16

Additional module, Interbus-S, 3-1
Aggressive gases, 3-1
Application as directed, 1-2
Application examples, Speed control,
11-2, 11-5, 11-7, 11-10, 11-12
Assembly, 3-1
Variant Cold Plate, 4-5
With fixing brackets or rails, 3-2
Automation interface, 4-26
B
Brake unit, 4-16
Bus connection, 4-25
Control cables, 4-19

Mains connection, 4-13
Motor connection, 4-16
Cable specification, 4-11

CANopen, 4-25
Chopping frequency, 6-2
Circuit diagram, Control connections,
4-21
Cleaning, 10-1
Code table, 11-15
Collective screen plate, 4-19
Commissioning, 5-1
Configuration
Function blocks, 8-4
Monitoring, 8-18
Predefined configurations, 8-1
Connection
Brake unit, 4-16
Control, Circuit diagram, 4-21
Mains, 4-12
Motor, 4-14
Connections, Power, 4-12

Control connections, 4-19
Control terminals, 4-19
Max. permissible cross-sections, for motor
Connection, 4-19
Overview, 4-19
Protection against inverse polarity, 4-19
Terminal assignment, 4-19
Controller, 1-1
Application as directed, 1-2
Assembled as Cold Plate, 4-5
Identification, 1-2
Controller protection, 2-2

Cooling air, 3-1
Current derating, 6-2
11-66
9300BA0998
Appendix
F
Fault indications, 9-4
Reset, 9-7
Definitions, 1-1
Feedback signals, 4-29

Dimensions
Encoder connection, 4-31

Resolver connection, 4-30
Temperature monitoring, 4-27
Standard devices, 3-2

Display, Actual values, 7-16
Free space, 3-1

Function blocks, 8-4
Configuration code, 8-6
Connect, 8-7
Display code, 8-6
Input name, 8-5
Input symbol, 8-5
Make connections, 8-9
Naming, 8-5
Output name, 8-6
Output symbol, 8-6
Parameterization code, 8-6
Remove connections, 8-10
Signal types, 8-4
Drive system, 1-1
E
Electrical data
200% overcurrent, 3-4
Types 9321 to 9325, 3-3
Types 9326 to 9332, 3-5
Fuses, 3-6
EMC
Assembly, 4-33
CE-typical drive system, Installation, 4-33
Global-Drive-Control, 11-1
Glossary, 11-65
Filters, 4-33
Grounding, 4-34
Installation, 4-33
Screening, 4-34
History buffer, 9-2
Encoder connection, 4-31
Assembly, 9-2
Working with the, 9-3
9300BA0998
11-67
Appendix
Identification, Controller, 1-2
Mains conditions, 4-11

Fuses, 4-13
Information on operation, 6-1

Inputs
analog, 4-20
digital, 4-20
Installation
CE-typical drive system, 4-33
Assembly, 4-33
Filters, 4-33
Grounding, 4-34
Screening, 4-34
electrical, 4-8
mechanical, 3-1
Mains filters, 3-7

Mains types, 4-11
Maintenance, 10-1
Manufacturer, 1-2
Message, 8-19
Messages, Fault, 9-4
Monitor output, 4-20
Monitoring, 8-18
Fault display via digital output, 8-22
Monitoring functions, 8-20
Reactions: Warning, Message, TRIP, 8-18
Motor cable, Screening, 4-14

Motor connection, 4-14, 4-15
Motor protection, 4-10
Standard assembly, 3-2

N
Notes on operation, 6-1
Insulation, 4-8
O
J
Jumper, analog setpoint selection, 4-20
Operating conditions, 3-2

Operating level, 7-9
Operating module, 7-7
Operating level, 7-9
Status indications, 6-1
Operating unit
L
Legal regulations, 1-2
Liability, 1-2
11-68
9300BA0998
Display, 7-7
Key functions, 7-8
User menu, 7-9
Oscillations, 3-1
Outputs
analog, 4-20
digital, 4-20
Overspeeds, 2-2
Appendix
Parameterization, 7-1
Safety information, 2-1

Layout, 2-2
Other notes, 2-2
Warning of damage to persons, 2-2
Warning to damage to material, 2-2
Parameters
Change, 7-10
Copy parameter sets, see Parameter set
transfer
Load parameter set, 7-12
Operating module, 7-7
Parameter classes, 7-2
Parameter set transfer, 7-14
Parameterization, 7-7
PC program, 7-1
Structure of the parameter set, 7-2
Ways of parameterization, 7-1
PC program, 7-1
Global-Drive-Control, 11-1
Power connections, 4-12

Max. permissible cross-sections
for mains connection, 4-13
for motor connection, 4-16
Scope of supply, 1-1

Screening
Control cable, 4-19
EMC, 4-34
Motor cable, 4-14
Selection lists, 11-60

Servo inverter, see Controller
Speed control, 11-2, 11-5, 11-7, 11-10,
11-12
State bus, 4-24
Switching on the motor side, 4-16
T
Technical data, 3-1
Technicaldata
Dimensions, 3-7
Electrical data, 3-3
Features, 3-1
Fuses, cable cross-sections, 3-6
General data/operating conditions, 3-2
Protection against contact, 4-8

Protection against inverse polarity, 4-19
Protection of persons, 2-2
Punching, 4-3
Temperature monitoring, 4-27

thermal separation, 4-3
Tightening torques
Control terminals, 4-19
Power terminals, 4-13, 4-16
R
Ratings, 3-3
200% overcurrent, 3-4
Controllers 9321 to 9325, 3-3
Fuses, cable cross-sections, 3-6
Mains filters, 3-7
Types 9326 to 9332, 3-5
RCCB, 4-8
Reset, Fault indications, 9-7
Residual hazards, 2-2
Resolver connection, 4-30
Transport, storage, 2-1

TRIP, 8-18
Troubleshooting, 9-1
U
User menu, 7-9
V
Variant Cold Plate, Dimensions, 4-5
Vibrations, 3-1
Voltage drop, 4-13
9300BA0998
11-69
Appendix
W
Warning, 8-19
Warranty, 1-2
Waste disposal, 1-2
11-70
9300BA0998
Appendix
9300BA0998
11-71
Appendix
11-72
9300BA0998

Ba93sugb PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ba93sugb PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ba93sugb PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EDB9300UE

Cold Plate (9321 - 9328)

Cold Plate (9321 - 9328)

Corresponds to the German edition of 22/06/1998

Screen plate mains connection

Detachable operating module

System bus (CAN)

Digital frequency input

Digital frequency output

Screen plate control connections

Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to use these Operating Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Layout of the safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General data/Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation of a CE-typical drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input of the motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Input of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Change of the internal control structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing of the terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Status indications of the operating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameterization using the operating module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rest of fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preface and general information

Preface and general information

How to use these Operating Instructions ...

In the following text used for

Preface and general information

93XX servo inverter

General The product-specific safety and application

Layout of the safety information

Warns of potential, very hazardous situation.

General data/ Operating conditions

Permissible temperature ranges

during transport of the controller:

Permissible installation height h

Low Voltage Directive

Types 9321 to 9325

Order no. EVS9321-CSV0 EVS9322-CSV0 EVS9323-CSV0 EVS9324-CSV0 EVS9325-CSV0

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400V / 50Hz/ 60Hz

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480V / 50Hz/ 60Hz

Types 9321 to 9324 with 200% overcurrent

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400V / 50Hz/ 60Hz

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480V / 50Hz/ 60Hz

150 % IrX for 60 s

75 % IrX for 120 s

200 % IrX for 10 s

Types 9326 to 9332

EVS9326- EVS9227- EVS9328CSV003

Order no. EVS9326CSV003

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400V / 50Hz/ 60Hz

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480V / 50Hz/ 60Hz

Fuses and cable cross-sections

Operation without mains filter

Input + UG, -UG

Operation with mains filter

The DC bus fuses are connected in parallel